Fuji Flexible Placement Platform

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc

System Reference

Original Instructions

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0
 CAUTION !
Contact Fuji or a Fuji representative before
transporting this product to a foreign location within
your company or selling it to a third party within
your country or a different country.
If this product is sold or transported to a different
country without contacting Fuji, it may not be
possible for us to supply spare parts or provide
maintenance.
 Fuji Flexible Placement Platform

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc

System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

FUJI MACHINE MFG. CO., LTD.

Copyright
All rights regarding the manual are reserved by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co. Ltd. This manual may not,
in whole or in part, be reproduced or reused in any way without the prior written permission of Fuji Machine
Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Trademarks
Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows 7 Professional Edition and Windows 7
Ultimate Edition, Windows 8.1 Professional Edition, Internet Explorer 11 are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Oracle Database 11g and Oracle Database 11g Express Edition (XE) are trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.

SQL Server 2014 is trademarks of Oracle Corporation.

Warranty and liability

Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. accepts no responsibility for the effects of the following: operating the machine
with non-genuine Fuji parts such as third party parts; usage with incorrect settings or in the improper
environment either intentionally or due to the fault of the user.

Notice
• The contents of this manual may be changed without notice.

• Every effort has been made to ensure that this manual is correct. However, please contact Fuji in
the unlikely event that errors or omissions are detected.

• Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. accepts no liability for damages that may arise as a result of this manual
(except for problems caused by defective products).
SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 Contents

Contents
1. Safety guidelines ....................................................................................................1
1.1 About symbols ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Degree of hazards................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Examples of the symbols ...................................................................................... 1
1.2 Safety rules for all machine types........................................................................................ 2
1.3 Safety rules for machines .................................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 Main machine........................................................................................................ 5
1.3.2 MFU-65/MFU-65II ................................................................................................. 9
1.3.3 Tray unit-LTW2.................................................................................................... 10
1.3.4 Tray unit-LTW...................................................................................................... 12
1.3.5 Tray unit-M .......................................................................................................... 14
1.4 Safety labels ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.4.1 Main machine...................................................................................................... 15
1.4.2 Other ................................................................................................................... 17
1.4.3 Machine safety label explanations ...................................................................... 18
1.5 Important points................................................................................................................. 19
1.5.1 Safety rules related to handling the machine ...................................................... 19
1.5.2 Disposal of linear motors..................................................................................... 19
1.6 Emergency stop button...................................................................................................... 20
1.7 Locking system.................................................................................................................. 21
1.7.1 Lockout procedure .............................................................................................. 21
1.7.2 Unlocking procedure ........................................................................................... 23

2. Unit components and functions ............................................................................25

2.1 Main machine .................................................................................................................... 25
2.1.1 Machine external components ............................................................................ 25
2.1.2 Inside the machine .............................................................................................. 27
2.2 Conveyors ......................................................................................................................... 29
2.2.1 Single conveyor................................................................................................... 29
2.2.2 Double conveyor ................................................................................................. 30
2.3 Operation panel ................................................................................................................. 31
2.3.1 Operation buttons................................................................................................ 31
2.3.2 Operation screens............................................................................................... 32
2.4 Signal lamps ...................................................................................................................... 36
2.4.1 Signal tower displays for machine conditions ..................................................... 36
2.5 MFU-65/MFU-65II.............................................................................................................. 38

3. Basic operation.....................................................................................................39

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference i

Contents SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.1 Turning on and off the machine ......................................................................................... 39

3.1.1 Turning on the machine power ............................................................................ 39
3.1.2 Waking modules.................................................................................................. 40
3.1.3 Changing a module to sleep mode...................................................................... 41
3.1.4 Turning off the machine power ............................................................................ 41
3.2 Enabling operation at each side of the machine................................................................ 42
3.2.1 How to enable operation ..................................................................................... 42
3.2.2 How to lock operation.......................................................................................... 43
3.3 Using the operation panel.................................................................................................. 44
3.3.1 Pressing buttons.................................................................................................. 45
3.3.2 Scrolling lists ....................................................................................................... 45
3.4 Displaying the manual mode screen.................................................................................. 46
3.5 Displaying the changeover menu ...................................................................................... 47
3.6 Displaying feeder set information ...................................................................................... 48
3.7 Displaying image monitor .................................................................................................. 49
3.7.1 Changing screens at a single robot machine ...................................................... 49
3.7.2 Changing screens at a twin robot machine ......................................................... 50
3.8 Displaying the on-machine editing screen ......................................................................... 51
3.9 Opening the front door....................................................................................................... 52
3.10 Stopping the buzzer........................................................................................................... 53
3.11 Setting feeders on a feeder pallet...................................................................................... 54
3.12 Removing feeders from a feeder pallet.............................................................................. 57

4. Preparing for production ...................................................................................... 59

4.1 Transmitting jobs ............................................................................................................... 60
4.2 Displaying exchange guidance for each unit ..................................................................... 61
4.2.1 Exchange guidance after transmitting a job ........................................................ 61
4.2.2 Exchange guidance after calibration ................................................................... 62
4.2.3 Exchange guidance selected from the changeover menu .................................. 63
4.3 Changing the job................................................................................................................ 65
4.3.1 Job changeover guidance ................................................................................... 65
4.3.2 Job changeover procedures................................................................................ 66
4.4 Replacing a placing head .................................................................................................. 67
4.4.1 Cautions when exchanging heads ...................................................................... 67
4.4.2 Important points about linear motors................................................................... 69
4.4.3 Head replacement guidance screen.................................................................... 70
4.4.4 Removing and attaching placing heads .............................................................. 70
4.4.5 Before setting an H02F head .............................................................................. 75
4.5 Exchanging nozzles........................................................................................................... 77
4.5.1 Nozzle replacement guidance ............................................................................. 77
4.5.2 Removing and attaching nozzles ........................................................................ 78

ii AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 Contents

4.5.3 Performing hybrid calibration .............................................................................. 80

4.5.4 Nozzle list............................................................................................................ 81
4.5.5 Nozzle station list ................................................................................................ 87
4.6 Exchanging feeders in batches ......................................................................................... 88
4.6.1 Feeder batch exchange guidance....................................................................... 88
4.6.2 How to perform feeder batch exchange .............................................................. 88
4.7 Exchanging feeders........................................................................................................... 91
4.7.1 Feeder exchange guidance................................................................................. 91
4.7.2 Removing and inserting feeders ......................................................................... 92
4.7.3 Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LTW(2)................................... 93
4.7.4 Operation when using the free allocation function .............................................. 94
4.8 Setting trays on a tray unit-LTW(2) .................................................................................... 96
4.8.1 Tray setting guidance screens ............................................................................ 96
4.8.2 Setting trays ........................................................................................................ 98
4.8.3 Tray pickup start point ....................................................................................... 103
4.8.4 Caution when inserting trays into the tray unit .................................................. 105
4.8.5 Changing magazines ........................................................................................ 106
4.9 Setting trays on a tray unit-M............................................................................................112
4.9.1 Tray setting guidance .........................................................................................112
4.9.2 Setting trays .......................................................................................................114
4.9.3 Specifying the tray pickup position.....................................................................118
4.9.4 Important points when inserting trays into the tray unit..................................... 120
4.10 Setting auto-tools for DynaHeads (DX) heads ................................................................ 121
4.11 Other changeover............................................................................................................ 122
4.11.1 Supply unit type changeover............................................................................. 122
4.11.2 Parts camera type changeover ......................................................................... 123

5. Performing production ........................................................................................125

5.1 Starting production .......................................................................................................... 125
5.2 Stopping operation .......................................................................................................... 126
5.2.1 Stopping the machine after the current operation is complete .......................... 126
5.2.2 Stopping after finishing and unloading the current panel
(stop after production of one board).................................................................. 127
5.2.3 Stopping the machine with EMERGENCY STOP ............................................. 128
5.3 Restarting production ...................................................................................................... 129
5.3.1 Restarting after a cycle stop or after finishing and unloading the current panel
.......................................................................................................................... 129
5.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop .................................................................. 130
5.4 Supplying feeder parts..................................................................................................... 131
5.4.1 Splicing Parts .................................................................................................... 131
5.4.2 Exchanging feeders .......................................................................................... 138

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference iii

Contents SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.4.3 Replacing feeders (tray unit-LTW(2)) ................................................................ 141

5.4.4 Replacing feeders when using dynamic alternate feeders................................ 143
5.4.5 Exchanging feeders when using the free allocation function ............................ 145
5.5 Replenishing trays on a tray unit-LTW(2) ........................................................................ 146
5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ........................ 147
5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier) .................. 153
5.5.3 Guidance display and procedure (when supplying parts to the supply magazine)
.......................................................................................................................... 159
5.5.4 Guidance display and procedure (for dynamic alternate tray resupply) ............ 165
5.5.5 When using the supply reservation function...................................................... 173
5.6 Replenishing trays on a tray unit-M ................................................................................. 174
5.6.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ........................ 174
5.6.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier) .................. 179
5.6.3 When using the supply reservation function...................................................... 184
5.7 Multi production operation (AIMEX-3).............................................................................. 185
5.7.1 Operation screens ............................................................................................. 185
5.7.2 Clearing errors during operation........................................................................ 186
5.7.3 Important points................................................................................................. 187
5.8 Clearing errors ................................................................................................................. 188
5.8.1 Error guidance................................................................................................... 188
5.8.2 Displaying error details...................................................................................... 189
5.9 Saving trace data............................................................................................................. 190

6. Using manual commands .................................................................................. 191

6.1 Items displayed in the menu ............................................................................................ 191
6.2 Cleaning command.......................................................................................................... 192
6.3 Position head command .................................................................................................. 194
6.4 Manage production command ......................................................................................... 196
6.4.1 Clear produced quantity .................................................................................... 197
6.5 Diagnosis command ........................................................................................................ 198
6.6 Remove panels command ............................................................................................... 200
6.7 Exchange command ........................................................................................................ 203
6.7.1 Exchanging parts supply units........................................................................... 204
6.7.2 Exchanging nozzles .......................................................................................... 206
6.7.3 Exchanging heads............................................................................................. 208
6.7.4 Maximizing the conveyor width ......................................................................... 210
6.8 Head adjustment command............................................................................................. 213
6.8.1 Cleaning head nozzles ...................................................................................... 214
6.8.2 Cleaning all of the nozzles ................................................................................ 215
6.8.3 Removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part..................................................... 216
6.9 Information command ...................................................................................................... 220

iv AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 Contents

7. Accessory Software............................................................................................223
7.1 Possible operations ......................................................................................................... 223
7.2 Starting Accessory Software............................................................................................ 224
7.3 Floor Monitor ................................................................................................................... 225
7.3.1 Displayed items and their meanings ................................................................. 225
7.4 Vision processing error analysis ...................................................................................... 228
7.4.1 Displayed items and their meanings ................................................................. 228
7.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring settings .......................................... 230
7.5 Warnings.......................................................................................................................... 231
7.5.1 Displaying warnings .......................................................................................... 231
7.5.2 Displayed items and their meanings ................................................................. 231
7.5.3 Displaying current warnings .............................................................................. 232
7.5.4 Displaying warning details................................................................................. 233
7.5.5 Displaying the warnings log list ......................................................................... 233
7.5.6 Setting the success rate.................................................................................... 234
7.6 Messages ........................................................................................................................ 235
7.6.1 Displaying messages ........................................................................................ 235
7.6.2 Adding messages.............................................................................................. 236
7.6.3 Editing messages.............................................................................................. 236
7.7 Error Search .................................................................................................................... 237
7.8 Service list ....................................................................................................................... 238
7.8.1 Displaying the services ..................................................................................... 238
7.8.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer service installer .......................... 239
7.9 Acquiring machine trace data automatically .................................................................... 240
7.9.1 Displaying the auto trace data page.................................................................. 240
7.9.2 Displayed items and their meanings ................................................................. 240
7.9.3 Specifying automatic trace data acquisition ...................................................... 241
7.9.4 Machine operation panel during automatic trace acquisition ............................ 242
7.9.5 Downloading trace data .................................................................................... 243

8. Settings and management .................................................................................245

8.1 Starting machine accessories.......................................................................................... 245
8.2 Machine configuration settings ........................................................................................ 246
8.2.1 Specifying nozzle cleaning settings .................................................................. 248
8.2.2 Specifying IPS dust detection settings .............................................................. 248
8.2.3 Tray pickup start point and movement direction settings .................................. 249
8.2.4 Reference position settings for tray pickup start point ...................................... 253
8.2.5 Specifying automatic changeover settings (barcode ID mode) ......................... 254
8.2.6 Specifying automatic changeover settings (handy scanner mode) ................... 256
8.2.7 Specifying panel position correction function settings....................................... 257

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference v

Contents SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.2.8 Specifying resupply settings for the tray unit-LTW ............................................ 259
8.2.9 Dynamic alternate tray supply settings.............................................................. 261
8.2.10 Specifying multi production settings .................................................................. 265
8.2.11 Specifying settings for reducing auto calibration time when exchanging heads
.......................................................................................................................... 266
8.2.12 Preventing dropped nozzles due to using feeder buttons ................................. 267
8.2.13 Supply guidance priority settings....................................................................... 268
8.2.14 Check the remaining part quantities when changing alternate feeders............. 269
8.2.15 Specifying the setting for feeder exchange guidance for giving the priority
to cycle time ...................................................................................................... 270
8.3 Module configuration settings .......................................................................................... 271
8.3.1 Nozzle statistical error settings.......................................................................... 273
8.3.2 Breakdown operation settings ........................................................................... 273
8.3.3 Auto backup pin settings ................................................................................... 274
8.3.4 Settings for hybrid calibration ............................................................................ 274
8.3.5 Specifying the panel quantity to display waste tape cleaning guidance............ 275
8.3.6 LCR check settings ........................................................................................... 276
8.3.7 Specifying part reject operation settings ........................................................... 277
8.3.8 Specifying nozzle defect detection .................................................................... 278
8.4 Data acquisition ............................................................................................................... 279
8.4.1 Acquiring trace data .......................................................................................... 279
8.4.2 Acquiring images............................................................................................... 279
8.5 Remote operation ............................................................................................................ 280
8.5.1 Upgrading unit software .................................................................................... 280
8.5.2 Upgrading machine control software................................................................. 280
8.5.3 Specifying the operation mode.......................................................................... 280
8.5.4 Conveyor calibration.......................................................................................... 281
8.5.5 Completing nozzle maintenance ....................................................................... 282
8.5.6 Forcibly clearing errors...................................................................................... 282
8.5.7 Specifying IPS brightness adjustment............................................................... 283

9. Using software tools .......................................................................................... 285

9.1 Image Viewer................................................................................................................... 286
9.1.1 Installing Image Viewer ..................................................................................... 286
9.1.2 Checking images with Image Viewer ................................................................ 287
9.2 NetworkSetting ................................................................................................................ 288
9.2.1 Changing network settings ................................................................................ 288
9.3 VersionUp ........................................................................................................................ 289
9.4 EmergencyInstaller .......................................................................................................... 290
9.4.1 Preparation procedures..................................................................................... 291
9.4.2 Running the installer.......................................................................................... 291

vi AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 Contents

9.5 TcpIpSetting..................................................................................................................... 294

9.5.1 Preparation procedures..................................................................................... 295
9.5.2 Setting procedure.............................................................................................. 295
9.6 Motion Adjustment Tool ................................................................................................... 297
9.6.1 Installing Motion Adjustment Tool ...................................................................... 297
9.6.2 Starting Motion Adjustment Tool........................................................................ 297
9.6.3 Operating status view functions ........................................................................ 299
9.6.4 Operating adjustment functions ........................................................................ 301
9.7 Equipment Check ............................................................................................................ 302
9.7.1 Installing Equipment Check............................................................................... 302
9.7.2 Checking machines on a production line .......................................................... 303
9.7.3 Checking machines not on a production line .................................................... 304
9.7.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors.................................................... 305
9.7.5 Checking the operation of units......................................................................... 307
9.7.6 Checking the tray unit-LTW calibration values .................................................. 308
9.7.7 Tray unit-LTW command list.............................................................................. 308
9.7.8 Conveyor command list..................................................................................... 310
9.7.9 Single action positioning operations...................................................................311
9.7.10 Checking the unit configuration......................................................................... 313
9.8 MEdit ............................................................................................................................... 317
9.9 IPS Viewer ....................................................................................................................... 318
9.9.1 Installing IPS Viewer ......................................................................................... 318
9.9.2 IPS Viewer window elements ............................................................................ 319
9.9.3 Basic IPS Viewer operation............................................................................... 319
9.9.4 Reading the displayed results ........................................................................... 322

10. Upgrading Software............................................................................................331

10.1 Upgrading machine control software ............................................................................... 331
10.1.1 Using Accessory Software ................................................................................ 331
10.1.2 Using VersionUp.exe......................................................................................... 333
10.1.3 When unable to upgrade................................................................................... 336
10.2 Upgrading unit software................................................................................................... 338

11. Troubleshooting..................................................................................................341
11.1 Troubleshooting points .................................................................................................... 341
11.2 Displaying error related information................................................................................. 341
11.3 Troubleshooting Common Problems ............................................................................... 342
11.3.1 Mark vision processing errors ........................................................................... 342
11.3.2 Part vision processing errors............................................................................. 343
11.3.3 Pickup errors ..................................................................................................... 344
11.3.4 Poor placing accuracy....................................................................................... 346

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference vii

Contents SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.3.5 Panel conveyance errors................................................................................... 348

11.3.6 If there are missing parts................................................................................... 349
11.3.7 Panel detection errors between modules .......................................................... 350
11.3.8 If an encoder backup error occurs..................................................................... 350
11.3.9 If there is computer system trouble ................................................................... 352
11.4 Troubleshooting common Fuji Flexa and Fujitrax related issues..................................... 357
11.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors .................................................................................... 357
11.4.2 Fujitrax related errors ........................................................................................ 358
11.5 Troubleshooting machine issues ..................................................................................... 360
11.6 Acquiring trace data......................................................................................................... 361
11.6.1 Acquiring temporarily saved data trace on the machine ................................... 361
11.6.2 Acquiring after operating system errors ............................................................ 361

viii AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 Introduction

Introduction
Provided manuals
The manuals listed below are shipped with the machine. In order to operate this machine in the safest and
most efficient manner, please read the provided manuals thoroughly and observe all instructions and
warnings.

• Setup Manual

• System Reference

• Mechanical Reference

• Programming Manual for Nexim

• Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa

Setup Manual
This manual is used for setting up new machines/units or for moving machines/units within your factory. This
manual provides instructions from setting up the machine/unit to making software settings.

System Reference
This manual provides instructions and settings for using the machine/unit in the most efficient manner for
production and changeover. Refer to this manual mostly for software and system items.

Mechanical Reference
This manual provides instructions for mechanical aspects of the machine/unit such as adjusting sensors,
preventive maintenance and replacing parts. Refer to this manual when performing maintenance on the
machine such as cleaning, lubrication, and adjustments.

Programming Manual for Nexim

This manual provides the instructions for programming the machine that are unique for this machine. Refer
to this manual when creating jobs or part data in Nexim, transmitting jobs, or editing jobs on the machine.

Programming Manual for Fuji Flexa

This manual provides the instructions for programming the machine that are unique for this machine. Refer
to this manual when creating jobs or part data in Fuji Flexa, transmitting jobs, or editing jobs on the machine.

Other
Some of the names used in this manual are not the formal machine/unit names. Refer to the following table.

Formal names Names used in this manual

AIMEX III AIMEX-3

AIMEX IIIc AIMEX-3c

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference ix

Introduction SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

x AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1. Safety guidelines
Fuji machines are designed and produced with safety as one of our main considerations. However, even a
perfectly designed and manufactured machine can be damaged, or someone can still be injured, if the
safety rules are not followed. It is the responsibility of the user to make sure that all safety rules are followed
at all times.

Read the safety guidelines before operating the machine and always use the machine in accordance with
the rules given.

1.1 About symbols

This safety guideline contains safety rules that the user must adhere to when operating and maintaining this
machine. An explanation of the warning labels attached to the machine is also provided.

Hazard degree definitions (level of danger) and symbols are used in the safety explanations of this manual
and on the warning labels on the machine. These are explained below. Be sure you understand the
meanings of these symbols before reading the manual.

1.1.1 Degree of hazards

Symbol Definition (level of danger)

DANGER Failure to observe this hazard warning will lead to severe injury or death.

WARNING Failure to observe this hazard warning could lead to severe injury or death.

CAUTION Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to personal injury or damage
to the machine.

1.1.2 Examples of the symbols

Symbol Explanation
A triangle is used to draw your attention to a hazard. The symbol inside the triangle
indicates the nature of the hazard (in this case, electric shock).

A circle with a diagonal line is used to draw your attention to an operation that is
prohibited. The symbol inside the circle indicates the nature of the operation (in this
case, "Do not touch").

A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to a mandatory

action. In other words, you are required to carefully perform the given instructions.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 1

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

1.2 Safety rules for all machine types

DANGER
Do not go near movable parts during automatic or manual operation.

• Body parts or clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting in serious injury or
death.

WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the conveyor inlets.

• Body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in injury.

• If using a single machine independently, install safety covers or interlock sensors at

the conveyor openings, in accordance with your local safety regulations, to prevent
injuries.

Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors open.

• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or clothing may get caught
in the machine, resulting in personal injury.

• When maintenance work is completed, return the safety covers and doors to their
original (closed) position.

Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons before operating the
machine.

• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons so that they
can be pushed quickly in case of an emergency.

Check the safety functions before starting operation.

• Before starting the machine, check the operation of the EMERGENCY STOP
buttons, the safety switches on the covers and doors, and all other machine safety
features.

• Do not use the machine if any of the safety functions fail. Contact your Fuji service
representative immediately.

Do not remove safety switches or disable safety functions.

• Do not short or remove the machine's safety switches or disable any safety
functions. Persons working on the machine may be seriously injured if operation
commands are issued by mistake.

Ensure that there is nobody inside the machine when working on the machine with
two or more people.

• Verify that nobody is in or near the machine before operating the machine.
Operating the machine may result in injury to people who are in or near the
machine.

2 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

WARNING
Do not go near a machine that has stopped moving.

• There are times during automatic operation when the machine may appear to have
stopped, such as while it is waiting for a panel, waiting for the next machine, reading
marks, or transmitting data. In such cases, once certain conditions are fulfilled, the
machine will begin moving again automatically, so care should be taken. Only go
near the machine after the EMERGENCY STOP button has been pushed.

• When the "production screen" is displayed on the operation panel, the machine will
begin to move once certain conditions are satisfied. Be aware that the machine will
begin to move regardless of whether these conditions are satisfied intentionally or
inadvertently.

Do not place hands near the main conveyor.

• Hands or other body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in personal
injury.

Always turn off power to the machine before performing maintenance.

• Failure to observe this is extremely dangerous and may result in sudden machine
movements or electric shock.

Do not insert or remove connectors while power is being supplied to the machine.

• Removing or inserting connectors while power is being supplied to the machine may
cause damage to the machine and electric shocks.

Stay clear from the machine when it is being lifted.

• Never put hands or feet under the machine when the machine is being raised by
means of a jack or other device for leveling or transport. Hands, feet, or other body
parts may get crushed by the machine, resulting in serious injury.

Do not wear gloves made of cloth when operating the machine.

• Rubber gloves will tear when caught by the machine and prevent hands from being
drawn into the machine. Gloves made of cotton or similarly strong material may
cause hands to be drawn into the machine. Do not wear gloves made of cloth when
operating the machine.

Long hair should be tied back.

• Long hair may get caught in machines that are operating. Hair should be kept short
or tied back so that it does not get caught in the machine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 3

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

WARNING
Turn off the air supply when removing items such as cylinders, valves, or filters.

• Removing cylinders, valves, or filters without turning the air supply off may cause
parts or particles to be propelled into the eyes.

• Be sure to turn off the air supply when removing cylinders, valves, or filters.

Wear protective glasses when removing parts from the machine.

• Be sure to wear protective glasses when removing or exchanging parts.

Check the machine operation panel and the target axes while manually operating the
machine.

• When operating the machine, carefully follow the instructions that are displayed on
the operation panel.

• Never operate the machine without looking at the operation panel. Operating the
machine without looking at the operation panel may lead to operating errors or
result in damage to the machine or products.

Do not touch the servo amplifier power terminal for at least five minutes after turning
off the power.

• The servo amplifier retains a high voltage even after the power has been turned off.

• Always wait at least five minutes, and ensure that the CHARGE lamp is off, before
performing any work that may result in contact with the servo amplifier terminal.

CAUTION
Confirm the operational status from the messages on the operation panel for
machines that support automatic changeover.

• On machines equipped with an automatic changeover system, it is difficult to

determine the changeover status from the front of the machine during production.
Follow the instructions on the operation panel.

Use the handle when opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers.

• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers without using the handle may
result in injury.

• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers with too much force may
result in damage to the machine.

Always wear headgear when working in or under machines.

• Failure to observe this could result in head injuries.

4 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1.3 Safety rules for machines

1.3.1 Main machine

30SET-0230

WARNING Related
sections
1 Do not insert hands or other body parts into the machine in the -
spaces between feeders, especially when there are only a few
feeders present on the MFU.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury due to contact with

the head.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 5

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2 2 6 7
5 4

WARNING Related
sections
2 Do not look directly into the vision processing light or the panel -
conveyance check sensor light. Wear tinted protective glasses.

• Eye damage may be caused by looking directly into the light.

3 Do not insert hands or other body parts into the opening of the -
part supply base waste tape processing unit.

• Failure to do so could result in injury.

4 When lifting a backup plate, be careful not to put your hands in -

the areas between the plate, conveyor width-changing ball
screw, and hexagonal shaft. Also, be careful not to cut your
hands on the corners of the conveyor rails.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

5 Use two or more people to lift up backup plates and be sure to -

maintain correct lifting posture. Do not lift a backup plate if you
are not strong enough.

• Plates are heavy, so lifting them may cause injury.

6 Do not touch linear motors immediately after operation is "4.4"

stopped.

• The shaft and coil section of linear motors remain very hot
even after operation is stopped. This may result in burns if
touched.

7 People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of linear "4.4"

motors in modules (do not come within 400 mm).

• A strong magnetic field is generated by linear motors. Exercise

extreme caution, because pacemakers may malfunction due
to the magnetic field.

6 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

8 9

10

10 30SET-0233

CAUTION Related
sections
8 Be careful not to pinch your hands when opening and closing the "3.9", "4.4",
front doors and sliding doors. "4.5", "6.6", "6.7"

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

9 Open doors completely (move all the way up).

• Injury may occur to any body parts in the machine if the door is
not completely opened (moved up). This is due to the
possibility that it might slide back down and injure any body
parts in the way.

10 Be careful not to hit your head or any other body parts against -
any items that protrude from the machine such as the part
supply base guides.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 7

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

14 15

11

11

12 13

30SET-0232

CAUTION Related
sections
11 Do not put your hands underneath the nozzle station when -
loading it in the machine.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

12 Maintain a good posture when moving the X and Y axes by "4.4"

hand.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

13 Be careful not to pinch your hands or other body parts between "4.4"
the XY robot and stoppers/covers when moving the XY axes by
hand.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

14 When working close to a linear motor (within 55 mm) do not use "4.4"
ordinary metal tools. Use non-magnetic tools.

• The magnetic force can pull metal objects and result in injury
(by trapping fingers or other body parts between the metal
objects and the linear motors).

15 Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches, and other precision "4.4"

machines away from linear motors (do not bring within 55 mm).

• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field

generated by a linear motor.

8 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1.3.2 MFU-65/MFU-65II

1
2
3
30SET-0228

WARNING Related
sections
1 When pushing an MFU-65 into the machine, ensure that no one "4.6"
is between the MFU-65 and the machine.

• A person could be seriously injured or crushed to death if

caught between the unit and machine.

CAUTION Related
sections
2 When attaching an MFU-65 in the machine, ensure that hands "4.6"
or other body parts do not get between the MFU-65 and the
machine.

• Hands or other body parts may get pinched or injured.

3 When moving and exchanging MFU-65s, be careful to not get "4.6"

feet or other body parts caught in the casters.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

4 When attaching/removing an MFU-65 from a machine, be sure "4.6"

to complete the entire process. Be sure to maintain adequate
work space when performing this work.

• The MFU-65 is automatically moved and this may strike

personnel and cause injury.

5 Stay off of the MFU-65. "4.6"

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 9

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

1.3.3 Tray unit-LTW2

3
4

1 5

30MEC-0820-a
2

WARNING Related
sections
1 A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if -
caught between a tray unit-LT and machine.

• A person could be seriously injured or even crushed to death if

caught between a tray unit and machine.

2 Lock the caster brakes whenever a tray unit is removed from the
machine.

• Removed tray units may caused injury if they move and bump
into people.

CAUTION Related
sections
3 Be careful not to pinch body parts when opening or closing tray "4.8", "5.5"
unit doors or covers.

• Hands or other body parts may get injured.

4 Do not leave the tray unit doors open while the unit is "4.8", "5.5"
unattended.

• Failure to do so could result in injury.

10 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

CAUTION Related
sections
5 When attaching a tray unit to a machine, ensure that hands or "4.8", "5.5"
body parts do not get between the tray unit and the machine.

• Hands or other body parts may get pinched or injured.

6 When attaching/removing a tray unit from a machine, be sure to "4.8", "5.5"

maintain adequate work space and complete the entire process.

• Tray units are automatically moved and this may strike

personnel and cause injury.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 11

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

1.3.4 Tray unit-LTW

5 1 7

2 30MEC-0886

WARNING Related
sections
1 When pushing a tray unit-LTW into the machine, ensure that no -
one is between the tray unit-LTW and the machine.

• Body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in injury.

2 Lock the caster brakes whenever the tray unit-LTW is removed

from the machine.

• Depending on the slope and condition of the floor, the tray unit-
LTW could roll unexpectedly, possibly resulting in injury.

3 Securely grip the magazine rack when lifting, carrying, or "5.5"

positioning it.

• The magazine rack is heavy and injury could result if it is

dropped.

12 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

CAUTION Related
sections
4 Be careful not to pinch body parts when opening or closing tray "4.8"
unit-LTW doors or covers. Do not leave the doors or covers open
while the tray unit-LT is unattended.

• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in injury.

5 When using the handle that adjusts the height of the tray unit- -
LTW, make sure that body parts are not caught between the
handle and cover.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

6 Do not insert body parts through the bottom of the tray unit-LTW -
into the inner section where mechanical parts are located.

• Failure to observe this could result in injury.

7 When attaching a tray unit-LTW in the machine, ensure that -

hands or body parts do not get between the tray unit-LTW and
the machine.

• Hands or other body parts may get pinched or injured.

8 When attaching/removing a tray unit-LTW from a machine, be

sure to complete the entire process. Be sure to maintain
adequate work space when performing this work.

• Tray units are automatically moved and this may strike

personnel and cause injury.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 13

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

1.3.5 Tray unit-M

1
3
1 30SET-0229

WARNING Related
sections
1 Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between the -
tray unit-M and the feeder pallet when attaching or removing the
tray unit-M.

• Body parts may get pinched or caught between the tray unit-M
and the feeder pallet, resulting in injury.

2 Use two or more people to lift, carry, or position the tray unit-M. -

• The tray unit-M is extremely heavy and injury could result if

dropped.

3 Do not insert hands or other body parts in the side spaces -

between the machine and the tray unit-M during automatic
operation.

• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in injury.

CAUTION Related
sections
4 Be careful not to pinch body parts in the tray unit-M door when "4.9", "5.6"
opening and closing it. Do not leave the doors or covers open
while the tray unit-LT is unattended.

• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in injury.

14 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1.4 Safety labels

To warn the operator of hazards, safety labels are attached to the machine at the positions indicated in the
illustrations below.

1.4.1 Main machine

AIMEX-3

㹰㹫㹱

㹇㹌㹒㹃㹐㹌㸿㹊ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹂㹓㹁㹒㹍㹐ࠉ㸿㹋㹎㸿㹁㹇㹒㹗
*2 㹁㹭㹬㹢㹳㹡㹲㹭㹰ࠉ㹑㹧㹸㹣 㸿㹫㹮㹟㹡㹧㹲㹷
㸿㹕㹅ࠉ㹭㹰ࠉ㹋㹁㹋㸦㹫㹫ࠉ㸧
㸰
㹧㹬ࠉ㹃㹬㹡㹪㹭㹱㹳㹰㹣㸦㸿㸧
㸯㸲㸦㸰㸬㸯㸧 㸰㸮
Side 1 㸯㸰㸦㸱㸬㸱㸧
㸯㸮㸦㸳㸬㸱㸧
㸰㸳
㸲㸮
ࠉ㸶㸦㸶㸬㸲㸧 㸴㸮
㸴㸮㸭㸵㸳Υࠉ㹤㹧㹣㹪㹢ࠉ㹧㹬㹱㹲㹟㹪㹪㹣㹢
㹡㹭㹮㹮㹣㹰ࠉ㹡㹭㹬㹢㹳㹡㹲㹭㹰㹱ࠉ㹟㹰㹣ࠉ㹰㹣㹯㹳㹧㹰㹣㹢

Side 2

*1

30SYS-1109

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 15

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

AIMEX-3c

㹰㹫㹱

㹇㹌㹒㹃㹐㹌㸿㹊ࠉ㹁㹍㹌㹂㹓㹁㹒㹍㹐ࠉ㸿㹋㹎㸿㹁㹇㹒㹗
*2 㹁㹭㹬㹢㹳㹡㹲㹭㹰ࠉ㹑㹧㹸㹣 㸿㹫㹮㹟㹡㹧㹲㹷
㸿㹕㹅ࠉ㹭㹰ࠉ㹋㹁㹋㸦㹫㹫ࠉ㸧
㸰
㹧㹬ࠉ㹃㹬㹡㹪㹭㹱㹳㹰㹣㸦㸿㸧
㸯㸲㸦㸰㸬㸯㸧 㸰㸮
Side 1 㸯㸰㸦㸱㸬㸱㸧
㸯㸮㸦㸳㸬㸱㸧
㸰㸳
㸲㸮
ࠉ㸶㸦㸶㸬㸲㸧 㸴㸮
㸴㸮㸭㸵㸳Υࠉ㹤㹧㹣㹪㹢ࠉ㹧㹬㹱㹲㹟㹪㹪㹣㹢
㹡㹭㹮㹮㹣㹰ࠉ㹡㹭㹬㹢㹳㹡㹲㹭㹰㹱ࠉ㹟㹰㹣ࠉ㹰㹣㹯㹳㹧㹰㹣㹢

Side 2

*1

30SYS-0869

16 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1.4.2 Other

For AIMEX-3, AIMEX-3c

*1

*1
30SYS-0870

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 17

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

1.4.3 Machine safety label explanations

Symbol Explanation
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection. Direct exposure to the lighting unit
may result in damage to the eyes. Use light protection eyewear when necessary.

Caution, Warning: Shock danger. *1: High voltage! Contact may cause electric
shock. Turn off the power prior to servicing. *2: Connect a 200 - 230V AC +/-10%
50/60Hz primary power supply to the machine.

Caution, Warning: Cutting danger An automatic tape cutter is positioned behind

this frame. Exercise extreme caution when performing maintenance.

Caution, Warning: Pinching danger. Do not insert hands or other body parts into
the opening when the feeder pallet is removed. Any inserted body parts may be
injured by the robot.

Caution, Warning: Beware of gaps There is a danger of body parts getting caught.

Caution, Warning: Moving parts Do not insert hands or other body parts. Moving
parts may cause injury. Turn off the power before inserting any body parts.

Warning: High temperature Contacting the main body and shaft of the linear motor
could result in burns. They are extremely hot. Be careful of burns.

Caution: Magnetic fields Heart pacemakers and other precision equipment could
be affected by the magnetic field. Always keep a distance of 400 mm or more.

Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection Wear eye protection such as

protective glasses while performing this procedure. There is a danger of foreign
objects such as dust getting in your eyes.

Prohibited: Do not touch. Do not touch the Y-axis linear scale.

Prohibited: Do not insert body parts. Do not insert hands or other body parts into
openings.

Warning: Do not step here. Do not step or stand on covers.

18 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1.5 Important points

1.5.1 Safety rules related to handling the machine

CAUTION
Do not operate the machine with sensors removed or disabled.

• Removing or disabling sensors will disarm the interlock. This will result in collisions
and damage to the machine.

Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when working with circuit boards.

• Failure to observe this may result in board damage.

• Ensure that the wrist strap is connected to the earth bonding point.

Do not push or pull on the mark camera unit when moving the placing head.

• The position of the mark camera may be shifted, which negatively affects the
placing accuracy of the machine.

Connect a 200 to 230 V AC +/-10%, 50/60 Hz power supply to the machine primary
power supply side.

• The machine may not function properly or be damaged if a power supply other than
that above is used.

1.5.2 Disposal of linear motors

Extremely powerful magnets are used on the stator of the linear motor. It is extremely important to perform
demagnetization as described below when disposing of linear motors. If disposal is done by a third party,
be sure to instruct them that demagnetization is necessary before disposal.

• Before removing the stator, be sure to turn off the machine.

• Before removing the stator, prepare a space with no magnetic materials in which to put it.

• After removing the stator, cover it with non-magnetic material such as paper or wood to a thickness
of at least 20 mm.

• Do not disassemble the stator under any circumstances.

• Heat the stator to at least 330 degrees Celsius for at least 1 hour (demagnetization processing).
Upon cooling, the stator can be disposed of as normal industrial waste.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 19

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

1.6 Emergency stop button

In the event of an emergency, push any of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons to stop the machine.
Emergency stop buttons are located on the machine at the positions indicated in the figure below.

30SYS-0871

20 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1.7 Locking system

When performing maintenance or service on the machine, all personnel who service the machine should
use locks to prevent others from turning on the machine power or air. This procedure is referred to as a
lockout. To prevent accidents, especially those caused by mistakes when multiple operators are present,
all related personnel should have thorough knowledge of lockout procedures.

1.7.1 Lockout procedure

Prepare two commercially available padlocks, and require all service personnel to carry lockout name tags.

1. Switch off the machine power.

2. Turn the main switch to the OFF position.

OFF

01SYS-0630

3. Pull out the red lever and lock a padlock in the lever hole. All personnel working on the machine should
attach their lockout name tags to the padlock.
OFF

01SYS-0632

Note
The presence of a name tag on the padlock signals that the machine is being serviced and that the lock is not to be removed.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 21

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4. In the same manner, rotate the air valve handle to the OFF position and lock with a padlock. All
personnel working on the machine should attach their lockout name tags to the padlock.

NXTSAF005

5. The lockout is complete.

22 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 1. Safety guidelines

1.7.2 Unlocking procedure

When finished servicing the machine, all personnel should remove their lockout name tags from the
padlocks. Once all name tags have been removed, perform the following procedure to unlock the machine.

1. Confirm that all personnel are clear of the machine.

2. Confirm that the machine is in a safe condition. Remove the padlock from the air valve and rotate the
handle to the ON position.

NXTSAF007

3. Remove the padlock from the main switch and rotate it to the ON position.

ON

01SYS-0631

4. This concludes the unlocking procedure.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 23

1. Safety guidelines SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

24 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 2. Unit components and functions

2. Unit components and functions

This chapter provides the names of components on the machine and explanations on the details displayed
at the operation panel, and functions associated with the operation buttons.

2.1 Main machine

The names of some main machine items are given below.

2.1.1 Machine external components

AIMEX-3
4
Side 2
5

5
6
3

Side 1
30SYS-1113

1 Main switch 4 Signal tower

2 Operation box 5 Front door
3 Operation panel 6 MFU-65, MFU-65II

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 25

2. Unit components and functions SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

AIMEX-3c

Side 2
5
4

5
6
3

Side 1

30SYS-0872

1 Main switch 4 Signal tower

2 Operation box 5 Front door
3 Operation panel 6 MFU-65, MFU-65II

26 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 2. Unit components and functions

2.1.2 Inside the machine

AIMEX-3

3
2
5
 
 

5 6
2
3
4

30SYS-1114

1 XY robot
2 Placing head
3 Nozzle station
4 Conveyors
5 Parts camera
6 Mark camera

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 27

2. Unit components and functions SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

AIMEX-3c Clamp type parts supply unit specifications

2
3
4
5
6
5 2
3

30SYS-0874

1 XY robot
2 Placing head
3 Nozzle station
4 Conveyors
5 Parts camera
6 Mark camera

28 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 2. Unit components and functions

2.2 Conveyors
The names of items on the conveyor are given below.

2.2.1 Single conveyor

4 1

30SYS-0875

1 Reference rail
2 Adjustable rail
3 Backup plate
4 Backup pin

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 29

2. Unit components and functions SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2.2.2 Double conveyor

3
2

1
5
6

5
6

30SYS-1116

1 Reference rail (lane 1)

2 Adjustable rail (lane 1)
3 Reference rail (lane 2)
4 Adjustable rail (lane 2)
5 Backup plate
6 Backup pin

30 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 2. Unit components and functions

2.3 Operation panel

This section explains each button on the operation panel and the operation screens.

2.3.1 Operation buttons

5 4 3 2

30SYS-0876

1 ENABLE/LOCK switch 4 READY ON button

2 POWER button 5 CYCLE STOP button
3 START button 6 EMERGENCY button

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 31

2. Unit components and functions SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2.3.2 Operation screens

Displayed areas
The operation screen is divided into the following areas.

30SYS-0877

A. Status display area

This indicates the machine production type and status.

Pictograms Explanation
Perform single lane production.

Perform dual lane production.

Pass mode for lanes 1 and 2.

Perform production in lane 1. Pass mode for lane 2.

The nozzle statistical warning function / simple regular nozzle changeover function is
enabled.
The board skip function is enabled.

32 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 2. Unit components and functions

B: Switch screen buttons / standard settings button area

The module number is displayed. In addition, there are various buttons to switch the screen being displayed.

Pictograms Explanation
This is the production button. Press this to change the machine to production mode.

This is the on-machine editing button. Press this button to open the on-machine
editing screen.
This is the feeder information button. Press this button to display the feeder
information.
This is the manual button. Press this button to display manual commands.

This is the changeover information button. Press this button to display the
changeover menu.
This is the monitor button. Press this button to display the images from the cameras
on the screen.

• The button with a white background is the currently active one.

C: Guidance display area

Operating status, requests for operator actions, changeover notices, and maintenance guidance display
here.

Pictograms are used for guidance. The background color of the pictograms depends on the type of
guidance.

1 2 3

30SYS-0881

1 Blue Operator work is required.

2 Gray This indicates the machine status is displayed.
3 Yellow This is warning guidance. The location for which the warning applies
is shown in the red frame.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 33

2. Unit components and functions SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

D: Job display area

The name of the job(s) in the machine display here. The upper line is for lane 2 and the lower line is for lane
1. This section also indicates the number of panels produced and whether or not a panel is present.

1 2 3 4 01SYS-0924

1 Job changeover guidance 3 Job name

2 Presence of panel on conveyor 4 Number of panels produced

The presence of panels can be judged from the color.

Display color Contents

White No panel is present on the conveyor.
Light green A panel that is currently being produced is present on the conveyor.
Green A panel for which production is completed is present on the conveyor.

Job display area when performing any side production

e b d

A Job name

01SYS-1064-a
f a c

a. The side of the panel being produced on each lane

• Immediately after transmitting a job, "Lane1:Top Lane2:Bottom" is displayed.

• During production, the side of the panel being produced displays for each lane.

• If production is stopped without a panel in lane 1, "Top" displays for lane 1.

• If production is stopped without a panel in lane 2, "Bottom" displays for lane 2.

b. Job name

c. Quantity of panels produced for the top side

d. Quantity of panels produced for the bottom side

e. Presence of panel in lane 1

f. Presence of panel in lane 2

34 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 2. Unit components and functions

Operation screen guidance

Operators are guided to perform work by the following screens.

Production mode screen Changeover information screen

30SYS-0938 30SYS-0939

Manual mode screen Error clearance guidance screen

30SYS-0940 30SYS-0941

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 35

2. Unit components and functions SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2.4 Signal lamps

30SYS-0882

2.4.1 Signal tower displays for machine conditions

It is possible to determine the condition of a module by checking which of the three color lights are on, off,
and flashing on the signal tower for that module.

Signal towers are attached to both sides of the machine to indicate to the operator the status of each side.

Action Machine status Signal tower display

priority (Situation)
1 Checking the line (checking the host settings) All three colors are lit
2 An error occurred (an error occurred at the machine) Red flashes and buzzer
sounds
3 Manual mode (when a manual command is used, or the Green is lit
machine is in PAM measurement mode or test mode)
4 Production stopped (the machine is waiting for the operator Red flashes and buzzer
to perform an action or a recovery limit is reached) sounds
5 Production has not started (when production has not Green flashes
started such as because changeover is being performed)
6 The machine is requesting some action from the operator Yellow flashes
(when the machine is waiting for parts to be set after
production begins)
7 Production is about to stop (when a part that cannot be Red on and buzzer sounds
picked is present)
8 Throughput dropping (when parts with statistical warnings Yellow on
are present)
9 Sending a message (when showing a parts out warning) Yellow flashes

36 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 2. Unit components and functions

Action Machine status Signal tower display

priority (Situation)
10 Preparing for production (when performing calibration) Green is lit
11 Producing (when production is being performed without Green is lit
any problems)
12 Waiting for previous or next stage (when the machine is Green flashes
waiting for the panel to be conveyed from the previous
stage or to the next stage)

Note
The signal tower display can be changed by specifying settings in Accessory Software. Refer to the Fuji Accessory Software Operation Manual
(online manual) for details.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 37

2. Unit components and functions SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2.5 MFU-65/MFU-65II
The names of items are given below.

30SYS-0883

1 Handle
2 Feeder pallet
3 Waste tape box

38 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3. Basic operation
This chapter explains basic operations such as how to turn on power to the machine, how to enable
operation at each side of the machine, and how to switch between different screens of the operation panel.

3.1 Turning on and off the machine

Power OFF

Main switch ON Main switch OFF

Sleep

Press POWER button Hold down POWER button

Awake NXTOPE043

Power off: The power supply to the machine is cut completely.

Sleep: Power is being supplied to the control PCBs, but not to the module hardware.
Awake: Both the hardware and software are booted up. It is possible to operate the
machine in the awake condition.

3.1.1 Turning on the machine power

1. Turn on the main switch.

Side 1
30SYS-0884

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 39

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2. Power is supplied to the machine. The modules start up. After starting up, the modules enter sleep
mode and POWER lights up.

30SYS-0885

3.1.2 Waking modules

This wakes modules from sleep mode.

1. Push POWER. The main screen displays when the job has finished downloading.

30SYS-0886

40 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.1.3 Changing a module to sleep mode

With the machine stopped, push and hold the POWER button for longer than four seconds and then release.
The module should then enter sleep mode.

4 Seconds

30SYS-0887

3.1.4 Turning off the machine power

Turn off the power before performing maintenance or when not using the machine for long periods.

1. Ensure that the machine is in the following state.

• Production or any type of processing is not being performed

• The main screen is displayed or the module is in sleep mode

2. Turn off the main switch. This cuts power to the machine.

Side 1

30SYS-0888

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 41

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.2 Enabling operation at each side of the machine

Parts can be supplied and maintenance can be performed at both side 1 and side 2 of the machine.
However, buttons on the operation panel can only be used at one side of the machine at any time. Switch
between sides to enable operation when necessary.

Side 2

Side 1

30SYS-0889

3.2.1 How to enable operation

Turn the ENABLE/LOCK switch on the operation panel to ENABLE. By turning this switch, operation is
enabled at that side.

ENABLE LOCK

30SYS-0890

On the operation panel at the side that operation is enabled, the background of the pictogram indicating that
operation is enabled turns blue.

42 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.2.2 How to lock operation

When you want to maintain operation at only that side, rotate the ENABLE/LOCK switch to LOCK.

ENABLE LOCK

30SYS-0891

On the operation panel, a pictogram indicating that operation is maintained at that side is displayed.

Also, the operation panel at another side displays a pictogram indicating that operation is not enabled and
locked.

30SYS-0892

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 43

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.3 Using the operation panel

CAUTION 78
• Do not touch the touch panel with wet hands. This may result in damage.

CAUTION 79
• Do not use pointed or sharp items to touch the touch panel.

CAUTION 80
• Do not disassemble or modify the touch panel. This may result in damage.

CAUTION 81
• Use a clean dry cloth to wipe off any grime on the touch panel. Do not use items such as alcohol
and benzene.

CAUTION 82
• If it cannot be cleaned with a clean dry cloth, apply an appropriate amount of neutral detergent to
the cloth and gently wipe off the grime. When doing this, be sure to not get any of the detergent on
any other items.

As well as guidance for operators, various functions and command buttons display on the operation panel.

The screen is a touch screen. Use a finger to touch it to perform operations.

44 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.3.1 Pressing buttons

Pictograms with a white border are buttons which can be pressed. Press inside the white border.

30SYS-0893

The background color of buttons depends on the condition of the machine.

1 2 3 4

30SYS-0894

1 White The button is selected.

2 Gray The button can be pressed.
3 Blue The button can be pressed. This guides operators to perform work.
4 Dark gray The button cannot be pressed.

3.3.2 Scrolling lists

When all the information cannot be shown at one time in the list, it is possible to scroll the list. Scroll in the
desired direction with your finger.

30SYS-0895

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 45

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.4 Displaying the manual mode screen

Press the [Manual] button on the operation panel from the main screen to display the manual mode screen.
Manual mode is used to perform actions other than production such as maintenance.

30SYS-0896

If the [Production] button is pressed while the manual mode screen is displayed, the operation panel returns
to the main screen.

Refer to " 6. Using manual commands " for details on manual mode.

46 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.5 Displaying the changeover menu

Press the [Changeover information] button on the operation panel from the main screen to display the
changeover information screen screen. Changeover information is used when changing jobs.

30SYS-0897

If the [Production] button is pressed while the changeover information screen is displayed, the operation
panel returns to the main screen.

Refer to "4. Preparing production" for details on changeover.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 47

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.6 Displaying feeder set information

Press the button for feeder set information on the operation panel while the changeover information screen
is displayed or during production in order to display the feeder set information screen.

30SYS-0942-a

If the back button is pressed while the feeder set information screen is displayed, the operation panel returns
to the screen displayed prior to changing the screen.

In addition, the feeder set information screen can be changed to the following two screens.

30SYS-1152

Feeder status This displays information for all slots.

30SYS-0950

Error feeder This displays a list of feeders for which processing by operators is
required. The displayed feeders are ones to be used in
production.
30SYS-0951

48 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.7 Displaying image monitor

Image monitor allows operators to check the results of vision processing and vision processing operations
from the parts camera and mark camera.

Caution
The machine operates with vision processing trace mode turned on when image monitor is displayed. When vision processing trace
mode is on, the machine cycle time will increase by approximately 20% due to a drop in the vision processing speed.

Note
The buttons on the operation panel are disabled when image monitor is displayed. When it is necessary to use the buttons on the operation
panel, change back to the production screen to use them.

The method of changing to image monitor is different for single robot machines and twin robot machines.

3.7.1 Changing screens at a single robot machine

Press the monitor button while the production screen is displayed to display the image monitor.

Image

30SYS-0898

Press the monitor button displayed in image monitor to return to the production display.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 49

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.7.2 Changing screens at a twin robot machine

Press the monitor button while the production screen is displayed to display the image monitor.

a. When the monitor button is pressed while the production screen is displayed, image monitor for the
side the button is being pushed on is displayed.

b. If the monitor button is pressed again while image monitor for the current side is being displayed,
image monitor for the other side is displayed.

c. If the monitor button is pressed again while image monitor for the other side is displayed, the display
returns to the production display.

Operation side
Image

Other side
Image

30SYS-1153

50 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.8 Displaying the on-machine editing screen

Press the on-machine editing button on the operation panel from the main screen to display the on-machine
editing screen. Use this when editing jobs at the operation panel.

30SYS-1082-a

If the back button is pressed while the on-machine editing screen is displayed, the operation panel returns
to the main screen.

Refer to the AIMEX On-machine Editing Operation Manual on the AIMEX system media for operation
procedures using the on-machine editing screen.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 51

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.9 Opening the front door

CAUTION 66
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to body parts if the door is not
completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come back down and
injure any body parts in the way.

Open the front door when performing work such as attaching or removing a placing head or nozzle station.

1. Ensure that the machine is stopped.

2. Lift up the front door.

30SYS-0873

52 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.10 Stopping the buzzer

The operator can determine that there is a problem at the machine when the buzzer sounds.

The buzzer sound is produced from a speaker on the operation panel. Press the screen to stop the buzzer.
You can press anywhere on the screen except for command buttons.

30SYS-0899

Note
Settings for the buzzer sound can be changed in Accessory Software. Refer to the Fuji Accessory Software Operation Manual (online manual)
for details.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 53

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3.11 Setting feeders on a feeder pallet

CAUTION 41
• Ensure that the guide at the base of the feeder is inserted into the slot. The feeder may collide with
the placing head.

Guide

Slot 01NST-0379

Note
Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for details on how to set part reels on feeders.

1. Place the feeder guide into the slot on the feeder pallet.

30SYS-0143E

2. Slide the stick feeder forward.

30SYS-0144E

54 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3. Lift up the lever, slide the feeder forward until the connector on the end of the feeder connects with
the feeder pallet, then insert fully.

01SYS-0663

4. Lower the lever. The "PWR" LED on the operation panel for the feeder is turned on.

01SYS-0664

Note
If the feeder is not set correctly, power is not supplied and the PWR LED does not turn on.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 55

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5. When using W8, W04b(c), W08b(c/f) feeders with 7 inch reel holders, ensure that the reel holders of
every second feeder are extended downwards. It does not matter whether the reel holders of odd-
numbered slots or even-numbered slots are extended downwards.

01SYS-0665

6. On the operation panel, the button to set feeders is displayed for individual slots with feeders being
set. Press the button to set feeders.

30SYS-0900

Note
The operation above is not necessary when using verification.

56 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 3. Basic operation

3.12 Removing feeders from a feeder pallet

This section explains how to remove feeders from feeder pallets. During operation, feeders can be removed
only if the slot status on the operation panel is shown in red.

Slot No.
30SYS-0902

Caution
Do not remove feeders from slots where the status is shown in a color other than red. Otherwise, the feeder may collide with the nozzle
during pickup and damage it.

1. Lift up the lever and pull the feeder out.

30SYS-0901

Caution
If the feeder is removed forcibly without raising the lever, the board inside the feeder may be damaged.

2. Grip the handle firmly and remove the feeder.

30SYS-0903

Caution
Be sure to firmly grip the handle to prevent the feeder from being dropped.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 57

3. Basic operation SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

58 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4. Preparing for production

The following preparations are necessary to start production.

a. Transmit the job to be used in production to the machine.

b. Set the units and parts required for production on the machine.

c. Specify machine settings in Accessory Software.

AIMEX-3, AIMEX-3c Nexim/Fuji Flexa Accessory Software

Start machine Create job ྛ✀タᐃ

Turn power on Machine configuration
settings
Set units
Heads Module configuration
settings
Nozzles, backup pins
MFU-65, tray units Transmit job
㒊ရࡢࢭࢵࢺ

Feederstray

START 30SYS-0905-E

Note
To use the parts verification function, part master and part data must be registered and barcode labels must be printed. When using Fuji Flexa
for your host system, verify parts using Fujitrax Verifier.

This section explains how to set units on the machine. Also refer to this section for how to perform
changeover when a job is changed.

Refer to "7. Accessory Software" or the Accessory Software Operation Manual for details on specifying
settings in Accessory Software.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 59

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.1 Transmitting jobs

A job contains the data required to produce a panel.

When there is no job in the machine or the job currently in the machine is different from the one to be
produced, it is necessary to transmit the job to produce. Jobs are transmitted from the host system.

1. Ensure that the operation panel at all modules in the line display one of the following screens.

A B C 30SYS-0904

A Waiting for START to be pushed (main screen)

B The current job does not exist in the module, however, the next job
does.
C Neither the current or next job exists in the module

2. Transmit the job from the host system. (Refer to Nexim Instruction Manual or the AIMEX Series
Programming Manual for further details on how to transmit jobs.)

Note
The following pictogram displays while transmission is being performed.

30SYS-0906

3. The job name is displayed in the operation panel when transmission is completed.

30SYS-0907

60 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.2 Displaying exchange guidance for each unit

Set the units required for the job onto the machine. Perform the exchange work as directed by the guidance
on the operation panel.

30SYS-0908

4.2.1 Exchange guidance after transmitting a job

Exchange guidance displays if the units set on the machine do not match those required in the job.

Camera exchange

Device unit exchange

30SYS-0909-E

When more than one changeover operation is required, the changeover guidance for the next changeover
operation is displayed once procedures for the current changeover operation are complete.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 61

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.2.2 Exchange guidance after calibration

Calibration starts when the START button is pushed. If production preparations have not been completed,
guidance displays on the operation panel to set units and parts.

Backup plate exchange

Nozzle exchange

Tray parts exchange (TU-LTW(2))

Feeder parts exchange

Tray parts exchange (TU-M)

Head exchange

30SYS-0910-E

Note
If production preparations are complete, the machine starts production.

Perform changeover by following the procedures displayed. When more than one changeover operation is
required, the changeover guidance for the next changeover operation is displayed once procedures for the
current changeover operation are complete.

When all changeover operations have been completed, the machine returns to the main screen.

62 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.2.3 Exchange guidance selected from the changeover menu

The operator can select items in the changeover menu to display exchange guidance for that item.

In this case, the main screen changes to display the changeover guidance menu screen. Refer to "3.5
Displaying the changeover menu" for details on changing screens.

Changing the job

 

Feeder batch exchange

Replacing nozzles

Replacing backup plates

Replacing feeders

Replacing the placing head

Setting trays

                         
30SYS-0911-E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 63

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Procedure
1. Select an item.

30SYS-0912

2. If changeover is required, guidance is displayed. If changeover is not required for the currently
selected menu item, an information screen showing the current status of that item is displayed.

A B 30SYS-0913

A Exchange guidance screen

B Set information screen

Note
The example screens shown above are for the nozzle replacement menu item.

If changeover work is required, following the guidance that displays.

64 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.3 Changing the job

In order to change jobs, another job must have already been transmitted to the background of the machine.
Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for how to transmit jobs.

Note
When using Fuji Flexa for the host system, refer to the AIMEX Series Programming Manual.

4.3.1 Job changeover guidance

JobNameLane2_T_00
Name of the background job
JobNameLane1_T_00

30SYS-0914-E

• The name of the background job for lane 1 is displayed in the lower row. The name of the
background job for lane 2 is displayed in the upper row.

• Press either the [Changeover information] button or the [Production] button to cancel the
changeover.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 65

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.3.2 Job changeover procedures

1. Press the [Change jobs] button.

30SYS-0915

2. Job changeover guidance is displayed. Press the [Change jobs] button.

30SYS-0916

3. The job in the background is changed to the current job.

30SYS-0917

66 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.4 Replacing a placing head

Set the heads required for production on the XY robot(s).

4.4.1 Cautions when exchanging heads

Take account of the following points when removing or attaching heads.

a. When removing or attaching heads, do so only following the procedures in the manual.

b. If the head is removed or attached under the following conditions, the power to the head will be on
during the procedure, and a 3A1F error will occur.

• CYCLE STOP was pushed to stop operation.

• The [Position head] command was pushed to move the placing head.

• EMERGENCY STOP was pushed to cut the 200V power.

Caution
If this error occurs, this head can no longer be used. In this case, contact your Fuji representative.

c. If removing and attaching the head is difficult only holding the head by the handle with one hand, use
the other hand to support the head from below. Do not strain yourself by trying to carry the entire
weight of the head in one hand, and be careful not to strike the head against the machine.

01MEC-1223

CAUTION 94
• When manually moving the XY robot, only use the X-axis or Y-axis handle on the X slide and the
bottom of Y slide to move it. If another location is used such as the placing head or mark camera
bracket, the placing accuracy may be negatively affected and the guide rails may be damaged.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 67

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

CAUTION 18
• For modules with twin robots, be careful when moving an XY robot so it does not hit the head on the
other XY robot.

Pay attention to the following points when exchanging heads.

30SYS-1084

When manually moving the XY robot from side 1 to side 2 for single robot modules, push the Y slide close
to the base position.

30MEC-0741

68 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.4.2 Important points about linear motors

WARNING 25
• Do not touch linear motors immediately after operation is stopped. Contact with high temperature
items could cause burns.

WARNING 23
• A strong magnetic field is generated by the linear motors. People with a heart pacemaker should
stay clear of linear motors (do not come within 400 mm). A heart pacemaker could malfunction due
to the strong magnetic field generated by the linear motors in modules.

a. When working close to a linear motor (within 55 mm) do not use ordinary metal tools. Use only non-
magnetic tools.

b. Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches, and other precision machines away from linear motors (do not
bring within 55 mm). Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field.

c. Do not hit the linear scale when exchanging the head and performing maintenance. If the linear scale
is damaged, errors will occur and production will not be able to be performed. In this case it will be
necessary to replace the linear scale.

30SYS-1083

1 Linear motor
2 Linear scale

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 69

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.4.3 Head replacement guidance screen

Exchange guidance

Procedures

Exchange guidance
The head type which is needed for exchange is displayed.
[Part Sensor]: Yes indicates that the head has a parts presence check sensor.
[Picker]: Yes indicates that the head has a backup pin picker.

Procedures
The pictograms indicate required work. Start with the work on the left.
30SYS-0918-E

4.4.4 Removing and attaching placing heads

Enable operation at the side to perform head exchange and then follow the procedure below.

Removing
1. Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

30SYS-0919

70 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

2. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

30SYS-0955

3. Open the front door.

4. Disconnect the connectors from the head. Use the relevant procedure below based on the head type.

• Heads other than DX: Remove connectors 1 and 2.

• DX heads: Remove connectors 1, 2, 3 and 4 in that order.

30SYS-1098

• When removing placing heads from twin robot machines, the operator must reach over the top of
the XY-robot to remove the connectors.

5. While holding the knob (1) up, raise up the harness duct(2). The harness duct remains in a raised
position when the knob is released.

30SYS-0920

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 71

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6. While holding the handle on the placing head, raise the clamp lever (1) as far as it will go. Pull the
handle (2) and then remove the head from the holder.

30SYS-0921

Note
The head may be difficult to remove from the holder due to vacuum remaining inside the head. In this case, slide the head up slightly to break
the vacuum and allow air to leak in.

7. After removal, always ensure to set the head in the head maintenance stand or place the head down
on its side in order to avoid damage to the nozzles.

42SYS-0186

72 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Attaching
1. Ensure that the attachment surfaces of the head and holder are clean. Use a dry cloth to remove any
foreign objects.

Placing head Head holder

01MEC-0158Ea

2. For the following placing heads, rotate the R-axis so that the arrow marks are aligned. The position of
the arrows depends on the head type.

• H08M, H08MQ, H24(G. S) heads

01MEC-1182

3. Rest the head on the hooks of the holder (1) and then push the upper section into place. Raise the
clamp lever (2) and then pull it forward and down to clamp the head into the holder.

(2)
4

(1)

30SYS-0922

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 73

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4. Raise the harness duct just a little and raise the knob, then lower the harness duct.

5. Connect the connectors to the head. Use the relevant procedure below based on the head type.

• Heads other than DX: Attach connectors 1 and 2.

• DX heads: Attach connectors 4, 3, 2 and 1 in that order.

30SYS-1099

6. If the handle for the head is a strap-type, ensure that the strap is flat against the head. Interference or
damage to the machine will occur if the strap is not flat against the head when the head is attached.

Strap-type
handle

01SYS-0187E

7. Prepare a nozzle station that supports the head.

8. Set the appropriate nozzle jigs in a nozzle station and set the station in the module. Refer to "4.5.2
Removing and attaching nozzles" for details.

Note
Nozzle jigs are required when the head is exchanged because it is necessary to perform calibration. Set the nozzle jigs at the same time as
putting on the head. Even if the same head type but with a different serial number is set on the machine calibration must still be performed.

9. If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.

10. Close the front door.

11. Attach the removed units to the machine.

74 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.4.5 Before setting an H02F head

A plate must be exchanged as shown below depending on the machine type on which the H02F head is to
be set.

No backup pin picker With backup pin picker

AIMEX-3
AIMEX-3c
NXT-3
5 5
NXT-3c 0.19Nm 0.19Nm
1 2

AIMEX
AIMEX-2
AIMEX-2S
NXT-2 5 5
NXT-2c 0.19Nm 0.19Nm
3 4
30SYS-0864-Ea

No. Part name (drawing number) Remarks

1 Plate (2MGTHH0004xx) For NXT-3(c), AIMEX-3(c)
2 Plate (2MGTHH0010xx)
3 Plate (2MGTHH0017xx) For AIMEX, AIMEX-2, AIMEX-2S, NXT-2(c)
4 Plate (2MGTHH0022xx)
5 Screw (2MGTHH0021xx) 4

Check the plate before setting the H02F head. If it is not an applicable plate for this machine, exchange it.

1. Remove the screws and remove the plate.

Note
Store the removed plate in a safe place. The plate will be needed when setting the head on a machine such as an AIMEX-2.

2. Attach the applicable plate for this machine and secure with the screws.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 75

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3. Lower the 2 Z axes and confirm that the attached plate does not interfere with their movement.

0.69 Nm

01SYS-0943

a. Remove the cover.

b. While holding the ball nuts for the Z-axes ball screws, squeeze both sides of the Z-axes brake using
your fingers to release the brake and gently move the axes to their lowest positions (fully extended).

c. Confirm that the plate does not interfere with the movement of the Z axes.

76 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.5 Exchanging nozzles

Set the nozzles specified in the job in the nozzle station.

4.5.1 Nozzle replacement guidance

Exchange guidance Nozzle status

Nozzle list

Procedures

Exchange guidance
The type of nozzle station required for exchange is displayed.
If nozzle station changeover is not necessary, only the currently set nozzle station type displays.

Nozzle status
The status of the nozzle set in each nozzle cavity is displayed.
The background color varies depending on the status of the nozzle.
1 Blue: Nozzle used in production
30 Black: Nozzle to be used in production that does not need to be set as it is already present.
Set nozzle jigs.
1 Red: Reading the 2D code on the nozzle failed or a nozzle statistical error occurred.
 Clean the nozzle or replace it with a nozzle of the same type.

Nozzle list
The nicknames of all nozzles that should be set are displayed.
The colored circle is used to distinguish between nozzle types. The same colored circle appears
on the flange surface of the nozzle.
Press the down arrow to scroll the nozzle list.

Procedures
The pictograms indicate required work. Start with the work on the left.

30SYS-0923-E

If all nozzles required for production are not set in the nozzle station, nozzle types that need to be set are
displayed in the nozzle exchange guidance. Follow the guidance and set the required nozzle types into the
nozzle station.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 77

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.5.2 Removing and attaching nozzles

CAUTION 32
• When setting nozzles in the nozzle station, align the cutout on the nozzle with the alignment pin in
the nozzle station and make sure that the pin goes into the cutout. If they are not aligned, nozzle
exchange errors occur.

Socket

Cutout Pin NXTNZC028-Ea

CAUTION 33
• Be careful to not put your hands underneath the nozzle station when setting it in the machine.

Enable operation at the side to perform nozzle exchange and then follow the procedure below.

1. Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

30SYS-0924

2. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

30SYS-0955

3. Open the front door on the machine.

78 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4. Move the red lever on the left side of the nozzle station towards the front of the module and pull
upwards on the front half of the station to remove it.

Nozzle station

Lever
30SYS-0260

5. Prepare the nozzle station to set in the machine.

6. Slide the plate over as shown below and insert the required nozzles as shown on the guidance screen.

Plate
Nozzle

NXTNZS004

Caution
Read CAUTION 32.

7. Return the nozzle station. Move the red lever on the left side of the nozzle station towards the front of
the module and then insert the rear part of the station first and then push down on the front end of the
station.

Lever 2

30SYS-0261E

Caution
Read CAUTION 33.

8. Return the lever back to its original position.

9. Confirm that the nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer base.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 79

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

10. If any other changeover items such as head exchange need to be performed, perform them at this
time.

11. Close the front door.

12. Attach the removed units to the machine.

13. This completes the replacement work for nozzles. When storing nozzles, store them in an
environment where the humidity is 30% or less.

4.5.3 Performing hybrid calibration

CAUTION 65
• Be careful to not lose the jig parts such as by dropping them in the module. Turning off the machine
main switch while the jig parts are placed at the placing area causes loss of the jig parts.

The following checks must be performed when performing hybrid calibration.

Checking the jig parts

When setting nozzle jigs for hybrid calibration, it is recommended to check the jig parts set in the hybrid
calibration stand. If the jig parts or stand marks are dirty, clean them with a cotton swab.

Chip jig part

Glass jig part

Hybrid calibration
stand
01SYS-0273-Ea

• When using H24(G, S) heads, do not set the glass jig part in the module (this part is not used by
these heads).

• When setting the glass jig part in the hybrid calibration stand, set the part with the printed side face
down.

80 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.5.4 Nozzle list

Useable nozzles are listed below. Nozzles can be distinguished by a color circle on the flange surface.

Color circle
Color circle

NXTNZC022-E

H01 and H02(F) heads

Nozzle size Color H01(F)/H02(F) nozzles (ID)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA0ASxx (L13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA0AXxx (L14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA0MZxx (L34)
Dia. 1.8 Light blue AA0HSxx (L15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA11Rxx (L35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA0HTxx (L16)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange AA0MLxx (L36)
Dia. 2.5G Purple AA084xx (L56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA0HWxx (L17)
Dia. 3.7G Yellow-green AA085xx (L57)
Dia. 5.0 Light purple AA0HXxx (L18)
Dia. 5.0G Red AA072xx (L58)
Dia. 7.0 Light purple AA080xx (L19)
Dia. 7.0G Dark red AA073xx (L59)
Dia. 10.0 Light purple AA081xx (L20)
Dia. 10.0G Navy AA074xx (L60)
Dia. 15.0 Light purple AA082xx (L21)
Dia. 15.0G White AA075xx (L61)
Dia. 20.0 Light purple AA083xx (L22)
Dia. 20.0G Gray AA076xx (L62)
Jig AA05Zxx (J03)
Jig (for angle correction) AA50Sxx (J08)
Jig (for HBC glass parts) AA78Exx (J11)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA78Fxx (J12)

Note
HBC stands for hybrid calibration.

Note
Do not set nozzles with rubber pads (for example, 2.5G or 5.0G) when using a head with a parts presence check sensor attached. The presence
of parts cannot be checked when using nozzles with rubber pads.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 81

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

H08M(Q) heads
Nozzle size Color H08M(Q) nozzles (ID)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow AA8LSxx (K11)
Dia. 0.7 Blue AA8DXxx (K12)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA8LTxx (K13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA8DYxx (K14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA8MNxx (K34)
Dia. 1.8 Light blue AA8LWxx (K15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA8MRxx (K35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA8LXxx (K16)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange AA8MSxx (K36)
Dia. 2.5G Purple AA8MExx (K56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA8LYxx (K17)
Dia. 3.7G Yellow-green AA8MFxx (K57)
Dia. 5.0 Light purple AA8LZxx (K18)
Dia. 5.0G Red AA8MGxx (K58)
Dia. 7.0 Light purple AA8MAxx (K19)
Dia. 7.0G Dark red AA8MHxx (K59)
Dia. 10.0 Light purple AA8MBxx (K20)
Dia. 10.0G Navy AA8MKxx (K60)
Dia. 15.0 Light purple AA8MCxx (K21)
Dia. 15.0G White AA8MLxx (K61)
Dia. 20.0 Light purple AA8MDxx (K22)
Dia. 20.0G Gray AA8MMxx (K62)
Jigs AA8KKxx (J23)
Jig (for HBC glass parts) AA9CExx (J27)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA9CFxx (J28)

Note
HBC stands for hybrid calibration.

Note
Do not set nozzles with rubber pads (for example, 2.5G or 5.0G) when using a head with a parts presence check sensor attached. The presence
of parts cannot be checked when using nozzles with rubber pads.

82 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

H24(G, S) heads
Nozzle size Color H24(G, S) nozzles (ID)
Dia. 0.3 Gray 2AGKNX0019xx (H13)
Dia. 0.35 Navy 2AGKNX0024xx (H20)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow 2AGKNX0027xx (H14)
Dia. 0.5 Dark red 2AGKNX0029xx (H21)
Dia. 0.7 Blue 2AGKNX0031xx (H15)
Dia. 0.8 White 2AGKNX0033xx (H26)
Dia. 1.0 Pink 2AGKNX0035xx (H16)
Dia. 1.3 Green 2AGKNX0017xx (H17)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange 2AGKNX0040xx (H22)
Dia. 1.8 Light blue 2AGKNX0037xx (H18)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange 2AGKNX0041xx (H23)
Dia. 2.5 Purple 2AGKNX0039xx (H19)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange 2AGKNX0042xx (H24)
Dia. 2.5G Purple 2AGKNX0014xx (H25)
Wide range nozzle Dark-green 2AGKNX0075xx (H35)
(S)
Wide range nozzle Yellow ocher 2AGKNX0076xx (H36)
(M)
Wide range nozzle Dark-purple 2AGKNX0077xx (H37)
(L)
Jigs 2AGKNX0004xx (J34)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) 2AGKNX0045xx (J44)

Note
HBC stands for hybrid calibration.

Note
Do not set nozzles with rubber pads (2.5G) when using a head with a parts presence check sensor attached. The presence of parts cannot be
checked when using nozzles with rubber pads.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 83

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

V12 Head
Nozzle size (mm) Color V12 nozzle (ID)
Dia. 0.3 Gray AA1ATxx (S10)
Dia. 0.35 Navy 2AGKNG0049xx (S61)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow AA056xx (S11)
Dia. 0.5 Dark red 2AGKNG0041xx (S60)
Dia. 0.5 C Dark red 2AGKNG0149xx (S63)
Dia. 0.5 CS Dark red 2AGKNG0208xx (S60)
Dia. 0.7 Blue AA057xx (S12)
Dia. 0.8 White 2AGKNX0033xx (H26)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA058xx (S13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA20Axx (S14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA064xx (S34)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA20Bxx (S15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA19Gxx (S35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA20Cxx (S16)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange AA065xx (S36)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA0WTxx (S56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA20Dxx (S17)
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA18Cxx (S57)
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple AA20Exx (S18)
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA063xx (S58)
Wide range nozzle Dark-green 2AGKNX0075xx (H35)
(S)
Wide range nozzle Yellow ocher 2AGKNX0076xx (H36)
(M)
Wide range nozzle Dark-purple 2AGKNX0077xx (H37)
(L)
Jig AA06Axx (J01)
Jig (for angle correction) AA4ZLxx (J06)
Jig (for HBC glass parts) -
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA7AGxx (J16)

Note
HBC stands for hybrid calibration.

Note
Do not set nozzles with rubber pads (for example, 2.5G or 5.0G) when using a head with a parts presence check sensor attached. The presence
of parts cannot be checked when using nozzles with rubber pads.

84 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

DX Head
Nozzle size Color R12 nozzle (ID) R4 nozzle (ID) S1 nozzle (ID)
Dia. 0.3 Gray AA1ATxx (S10) - -
Dia. 0.35 Navy 2AGKNG0049xx - -
(S61)
Dia. 0.4 Yellow AA056xx (S11) - -
Dia..0.5 Dark-red 2AGKNG0041xx - -
(S60)
Dia..0.5 C Dark-red 2AGKNG0149xx - -
(S63)
Dia..0.5 CS Dark-red 2AGKNG0208xx - -
(S60)
Dia. 0.7 Blue AA057xx (S12) - -
Dia. 0.8 White 2AGKNG0097xx - -
(S62)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA058xx (S13) 2AGKNM0002xx 2AGKNL0063xx
(YA3) (LC3)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA20Axx (S14) 2AGKNM0003xx 2AGKNL0064xx
(YA4) (LC4)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA064xx (S34) 2AGKNM0017xx 2AGKNL0080xx
(YH4) (LK4)
Dia. 1.8 Light blue AA20Bxx (S15) 2AGKNM0004xx 2AGKNL0065xx
(YA5) (LC5)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA19Gxx (S35) 2AGKNM0018xx 2AGKNL0081xx
(YH5) (LK5)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA20Cxx (S16) 2AGKNM0005xx 2AGKNL0066xx
(YA6) (LC6)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange AA065xx (S36) 2AGKNM0019xx 2AGKNL0082xx
(YH6) (LK6)
Dia. 2.5G Purple AA0WTxx (S56) 2AGKNM0011xx 2AGKNL0073xx
(YE6) (LG6)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA20Dxx (S17) 2AGKNM0006xx 2AGKNL0067xx
(YA7) (LC7)
Dia. 3.7G Yellow-green AA18Cxx (S57) 2AGKNM0012xx 2AGKNL0074xx
(YE7) (LG7)
Dia. 5.0 Light purple AA20Exx (S18) 2AGKNM0007xx 2AGKNL0068xx
(YA8) (LC8)
Dia. 5.0G Red AA063xx (S58) 2AGKNM0013xx 2AGKNL0075xx
(YE8) (LG8)
Dia. 7.0 Light purple - 2AGKNM0008xx 2AGKNL0069xx
(YA9) (LC9)
Dia. 7.0G Dark red - 2AGKNM0014xx 2AGKNL0076xx
(YE9) (LG9)
Dia. 10.0 Light purple - 2AGKNM0009xx 2AGKNL0070xx
(YB0) (LD0)
Dia. 10.0G Navy - 2AGKNM0015xx 2AGKNL0077xx
(YF0) (LG0)

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 85

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Nozzle size Color R12 nozzle (ID) R4 nozzle (ID) S1 nozzle (ID)
Dia. 15.0 Light purple - - 2AGKNL0071xx
(LD1)
Dia. 15.0G White - - 2AGKNL0078xx
(LJ1)
Dia. 20.0 Light purple - - 2AGKNL0072xx
(LD2)
Dia. 20.0G Gray - - 2AGKNL0079xx
(LJ2)
Jig AA06Axx (J01) 2AGKNM0045xx 2AGKNL0056xx
(J35) (J46)
Jig (for angle correction) AA4ZLxx (J06) - -
Jig (for HBC glass parts) - 2AGKNM0043xx 2AGKNL0118xx
(J39) (J40)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA7AG 2AGKNM0042xx 2AGKNL0117xx
(J41) (J42)

Note
HBC stands for hybrid calibration.

Note
Do not set nozzles with rubber pads (for example, 2.5G or 5.0G) when using a head with a parts presence check sensor attached. The presence
of parts cannot be checked when using nozzles with rubber pads.

86 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.5.5 Nozzle station list

The useable nozzle stations are listed below.

Identification
Identification code Identification
code code

01SYS-0377-E

Identification Heads Remarks

code (cavities)
NC03C (3) H01/H02(F) heads
NC08C (8)
NC8LC (8) Tray unit-LTW(2), tray unit-M
NCPTC (16) Tray unit-LTW(2), long
NCKTC (11) Tray unit-LTW(2), long
NCFTC (6) Tray unit-LTW(2), short
NCETC (5) Tray unit-LTW(2), short
NL30A (30) H08M(Q) heads
NL16A (16) Tray unit-LTW(2), tray unit-M
NL17A (17) Tray unit-LTW(2), tray unit-M
NL18A (18) Tray unit-LTW(2), short
NL36A (36)
NA74A (74) H24(G, S) heads
NB12A DX heads
NB14A Tray unit-LTW(2)
NB15A
NB16A Tray unit-LTW(2), coplanarity check sensor attached
NB23A

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 87

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.6 Exchanging feeders in batches

For machines with the clamp type parts supply unit specifications, it is possible to perform feeder batch
exchange.

Exchange the feeders by MFU-65(2). Feeders for the next production are loaded onto a spare MFU-65(2)
which is used to replace the MFU-65(2) currently being used at the machine. This helps minimize
changeover time.

4.6.1 Feeder batch exchange guidance

Procedures
Procedures

Procedures
The pictograms indicate required work. Start with the work on the left.
30SYS-0925-E

4.6.2 How to perform feeder batch exchange

Feeder batch exchange is started from the changeover guidance screen. Enable operation at the side to
perform batch exchange and then follow the procedure below.

1. Select the [Batch feeder change] button.

30SYS-0926

2. Exchange guidance is displayed at the screen. Exchange the MFU-65 by following the guidance.

88 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Removing the MFU-65(2)

1. Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

30SYS-0927

2. Slowly remove the MFU-65(2) from the machine.

30SYS-0955

Attaching an MFU-65(2)
1. Prepare an MFU-65(2) with feeders set on it.

30SYS-0958

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 89

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2. Insert the MFU-65(2) into the machine.

30SYS-0957

Note
Refer to the "Basic operation" chapter in the mechanical reference manual for detailed explanations on how to set the MFU-65(2).

3. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine clamps the MFU-65(2).

30SYS-0928

Note
The red frames in the pictogram indicates that the MFU-65(2) is not pushed in enough. When the red frames in three locations go off, the
machine clamps the MFU-65(2) automatically and there is no need to use buttons on the operation panel.

4. Press the button to set feeders.

30SYS-0929

Note
Press all of the displayed buttons to set feeders.

90 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.7 Exchanging feeders

Set the part tape on feeders in advance. Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for details on how to set
part reels on feeders.

4.7.1 Feeder exchange guidance

There are two types of feeder exchange guidance: detail view and list view. Either of them requires setting
the feeders in the displayed slots.

In order to display the applicable slot list, press the button to display feeder set information to switch the
screen and then select the button to display error feeders.

Feeder information

Slot information
Slot status (indicated by icons)
Stage number
Slot number
Parts out warning time (min)
Feeder name
Index pitch
Width
Error code
Guide type
Detail view Device comment

Exit
Error feeder

Slot information
Slot status
Stage number
Slot number
Index pitch
Width
Device comment

List view

30SYS-0930-E

Note
Exchange feeders by following the instructions in the guidance. It is also possible to perform feeder exchange during production.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 91

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.7.2 Removing and inserting feeders

When using verification, it is necessary to create a relationship between the feeder and the parts reel. Refer
to the host system manual.

Enable operation at the side to perform feeder exchange and then follow the procedure below.

1. Slots displayed with red marks on the operation panel are for feeders that need to be exchanged or
require to be checked.

30SYS-0931

2. Remove the feeder. Refer to "3.12 Removing feeders from a feeder pallet" for details of removing.

30SYS-0142

3. Set the feeder with the new parts into the slot. Refer to "3.11 Setting feeders on a feeder pallet" for
details on setting feeders.

30SYS-0143E

92 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4. The buttons to set feeders is displayed for slots in which feeders have been set. Press the button to
set feeders.

30SYS-0900

Note
The operation above is not necessary when using verification.

4.7.3 Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LTW(2)

On a machine with a tray unit-LTW(2), if parts for feeders and trays must be supplied, the guidance for
supplying tray parts is displayed first.

In this case, complete setting trays or change to the feeder part supply guidance by pressing the button to
set feeders.

30SYS-0959

Pressing the button to set trays on the screen while the feeder part supply guidance is displayed returns to
the tray part supply guidance.

The method for setting feeders is the same as setting on feeder pallets. Correctly insert the feeders into the
feeder slots for the tray unit-LTW(2).

Note
After setting feeders, if the tray unit-LTW(2) is removed from the machine, feeders are also removed from the machine at the same time because
they are attached to the tray unit-LTW(2). It is necessary to press the buttons to set feeders for the set slots after the tray unit-LTW(2) is set
back into the machine. (When verification is not being used.)

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 93

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.7.4 Operation when using the free allocation function

This section contains information about removing and inserting feeders when using the free allocation
function.

Parts out conditions that occur during production can be checked at either of the screens listed below.
Check the parts out condition at the screen which is most convenient (this will vary depending on whether
or not Kit Handy is used and the location of the computer).

a. Machine operation panel

b. Kit Handy

c. Kit Manager

Note
Check the machine operation panel if it is not necessary to perform quick verification (for example, when a feeder for which a relationship
between the parts reel and feeder has already been created is used). Check the screen at Kit Handy or Kit Manager if it is necessary to perform
quick verification while setting the feeder.

The feeder exchange guidance displayed on the machine operation panel is the same as when the free
allocation function is not being used. Refer to "4.7.1 Feeder exchange guidance" for details.

Also, if a feeder is already set in the slot which is specified in the job, then an asterisk (*) is displayed in the
[Slot] column.

30SYS-0932

Note
If a feeder is not already set in the slot which is specified in the job, then a slot number is displayed. In the screen shown above, slot 46 is
displayed, but the feeder can be set in any slot.

When using Kit Handy, check the [Status] column at the part status list screen (shown below). An asterisk
(*) is displayed in the location column of the slots which require feeders to be set. When using Kit Manager,
check for an asterisk (*) in the list view.

Slot without feeder

1-1-11-0

Slot number

01SYS-0192E

94 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Note
In the screen shown above, guidance for setting the feeder which is specified for slot 11 in the job is displayed.

Procedure
1. If any of the units below are used in production, they must be set in the slot which is specified in the
job.

a. Reject parts conveyor

b. Dip flux unit

2. Check the appropriate screen in either Kit Handy or Kit Manager. Select the slot(s) for which [No
Feeder] is displayed and perform quick verification. If quick verification has already been performed,
check the machine operation panel.

3. Set the verified feeder into any slot on the feeder pallet. The feeder can be set at any slot on the same
stage of the specified module. Refer to "3.11 Setting feeders on a feeder pallet" for details on setting
feeders.

Note
If no empty slots exist, remove a feeder that is not used in production. Feeders which are not being used can be identified by checking the slot
status on the operation panel. The status is not displayed for slots at which feeders are not being used.

4. Ensure that the slot status on the operation panel is changed to green for the feeder which was set.

30SYS-0943

5. Repeat the procedures above until all necessary feeders have been set.

Note
Due to the difference in the number of slots occupied by different feeders, there are cases when it is not possible to set all feeders depending
on the allocation. When using a job that requires several different feeder types, set the narrowest feeders (the feeders occupying the fewest
number of slots) in the lowest possible slot numbers (slot 1, 2, ...).

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 95

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.8 Setting trays on a tray unit-LTW(2)

Set trays parts as indicated in the guidance.

4.8.1 Tray setting guidance screens

The guidance that displays depends on whether verification is being used or not.

When using verification

Magazine change buttons

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slot

Slot
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
Press the up and down arrows to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 12).
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting is complete, the red mark changes to green.

Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed

Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"A-2-1" represents the upper magazine, slot 2, subslot 1.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot
 to run out is displayed.
The estimated remaining time (minutes) for parts

Magazine change buttons Set tray parts (magazine A)

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B)

30SYS-0933-E

96 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

When not using verification

Screen change buttons

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
Press the up and down arrows to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 12).
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting is complete, the red mark changes to green.

Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed

Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"A-2-1" represents the upper magazine, slot 2, subslot 1.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot.

Screen change buttons Set tray parts (magazine A)

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B)

30SYS-0934-E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 97

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.8.2 Setting trays

CAUTION 39
• If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper, the tray drawer and magazine
may be damaged.

Enable operation at the side to set trays and then follow the procedure below.

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTW(2). There are two front doors on the unit. Open the door for
the area that you are supplying trays.

30SYS-0960

2. Check the slots to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition, the LED for
the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen flashes.

LED 01SYS-0246

98 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

3. Open the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0961

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0736E

Note
With the tray drawer stopper lowered, tray drawers can be pulled out about halfway. This is designed so that the operators can check the part
condition. When supplying parts, be sure to raise the tray drawer stopper.

4. Remove the tray drawer from the slot that parts are to be supplied.

01SYS-0719

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 99

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Verifying tray parts

This work is only required when using verification.

1. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.

Kit Handy

30SYS-0157E

a. At Kit Handy or Kit Manager, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.

b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID. If tray verification with
position check is being used, scan the FIDL (tray drawer) and the DID (tray).

Note
Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for details on tray verification. When using Fujitrax, refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the
Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for details on verifying trays.

2. You can specify the first part to pick up using Kit Handy. Refer to "4.8.3 Tray pickup start point" for
details.

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.

Tray Tray drawer

Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2

2. Gently set the tray drawer in the appropriate slot.

01SYS-0239

100 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Note
Gently set the tray drawer into the magazine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.

Note
If you wish to change the display to supply trays for other slots, use the up and down arrow keys on the operation panel to select the slot and
then set trays.

3. Specify the first part to pick up here. Refer to "4.8.3 Tray pickup start point" for details.

4. Press the button to set trays with the slot for which you are performing supply work selected.

30SYS-0935

Note
Steps 3 and 4 are not required if using verification.

5. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all necessary
trays have been set.

6. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.

30SYS-0936

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 101

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7. Close the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0962

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to lower the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0737E

8. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-0963

Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW(2).

102 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.8.3 Tray pickup start point

It is possible to specify the pickup start point for trays when setting them in the tray unit-LTW(2) from Kit
Handy or the operation panel on the machine.

Specifying the pickup point on the machine

The pickup point setting is accessed from the tray exchange guidance screen. From the tray exchange
guidance screen, select the pickup point pictogram and then press OK.

1. Press the pickup start point display.

30SYS-0966

2. Specify the X and Y coordinates. Change the X and Y values by pressing the screen.

30SYS-0965

Note
The default values for pickup point settings are the current pickup point.

3. Press [OK] on the key pad when finished.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 103

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Specifying the pickup point from Kit Handy

Perform the following steps on a Kit Handy.

1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit.

2. Specify the column (X) and row (Y) for the first pickup cavity in Kit Handy.

30SYS-0171E

Note
If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.

Note
The specification for the part supply direction is different depending on the direction of the tray set in the drawer even if the same tray is used.

Direction 0 Direction 90
(X, Y) = (4, 4)

(X, Y) = (1, 4)

Direction 180 Direction 270

(X, Y) = (4, 3)

(X, Y) = (3, 1)
30SYS-0172E

3. Tap [OK].

104 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.8.4 Caution when inserting trays into the tray unit

1. Trays have direction. When setting trays in the drawer and loading the drawers in the tray unit-LTW(2),
be careful to use the correct direction.

2. The yellow lines on the drawer indicate the positions checked by the tray height sensors. Be careful
not to place any items taller than the tray such as magnets on these yellow lines.

3. Do not insert tray drawers in a tilted manner into the tray unit-LTW.

4. Gently open and close the doors so as not to dislodge parts. If parts are dislodged, they may come
out of their pockets in the tray. For safety reasons, the doors are automatically locked and cannot be
opened. Do not try to open the doors when they are locked.

5. At the side (stage) where parts supply guidance is displayed, operation guidance is displayed if
operation is not enabled at that side. Change to enable operation and then supply parts.

30SYS-0967

6. When using trays with a height of 1.5 inches and specifying either the upper or lower magazine as the
supply magazine, consider the following.

• Four slots must be left empty out of the slots used for drawer rejection.

• Available slots are 1 to 8.

30SYS-0968

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 105

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.8.5 Changing magazines

CAUTION 56
• When changing magazines, be very careful to not drop a magazine. Personal injury and machine
damage could result if a magazine is dropped.

CAUTION 21
• When handling a magazine with trays loaded in it, handle it gently so the tray parts are not
dislodged.

It is possible to remove the magazines in a tray unit-LTW. It is possible to reduce changeover time by
changing the previous job magazines with magazines that already have the trays set in them during
changeover on a tray unit-LTW.

Note that changing the magazines is not possible for the tray unit-LTW2.

30SYS-0964

Enable operation at the side to perform magazine batch exchange and then follow the procedure below.

106 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Removing magazines
1. Push the MAGAZINE CLAMP button. There are two magazines, a top magazine and a bottom
magazine. Push the button for the magazine that you want to change.

30SYS-0728

2. Open the front door. Open the door for the area that you are changing the magazine.

Front door

Front door

30SYS-0699E

3. Remove the magazine from the tray unit-LTW by following the sub steps below.

a. Slide the magazine stopper over.

30SYS-0250E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 107

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

b. Slowly pull forward the plate that the magazine is set on until it is locked into position. Slowly pull
forward the plate that the magazine is set on until it is locked into position.

Magazine

Plate 01SYS-0244

c. Slide the magazine forward a short distance, and then remove it from the tray unit-LTW.

Magazine

01SYS-0245

108 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Attaching magazines
1. Load the magazine that has the trays set in it in the tray unit-LTW by following the sub steps below.

a. Confirm that the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons are not lit.

30SYS-0251E

Note
With the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons lit, even if a magazine is set, clamping will not operate correctly. Also, if magazines are set with power to
the tray unit-LTW off, it is necessary to check by eye the position of the magazine side clamper.

Confirm that the side clamper

sticks out.

01SYS-0355-E

b. Set the magazine on the plate. Slide it back until the magazine position is set by the positioning pins.

Positioning pins

Magazine

Plate 01SYS-0247

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 109

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

c. Move the lever to unlock the plate and gently push in the magazine.

Magazine

Lever
01SYS-0248

d. Slide the magazine stopper over. The magazine is locked into position.

30SYS-0252

2. Check all the parts that are set in the magazine to ensure that they are correct by following the sub
steps below.

a. Check the tray parts for a slot that has a lit LED, and if the parts are correct, then press the button to
set trays on the operation panel.

LED 01SYS-0246

b. Specify the first part to pick up here. Refer to "4.8.3 Tray pickup start point" for details.

c. While checking the operation panel, repeat steps a and b for all slots that require trays.

110 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

d. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when all of the trays have been checked.

30SYS-0936

3. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. When exchanging the other magazine, repeat
these procedures up to this step.

30SYS-0700

Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 111

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.9 Setting trays on a tray unit-M

Set trays parts as indicated in the guidance.

4.9.1 Tray setting guidance

The guidance that displays depends on whether Fujitrax Verifier is being used or not.

When using verification

Magazine change button

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots

"A" and "B" represent the position in which the tray unit-M is set on the feeder pallet (A: left, B: right).
Press the up and down arrow keys to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 10).
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting is complete, the red mark changes to green.

Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed

Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"B-1" is slot 1 of the tray unit set on the right. 
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot
 to run out is displayed.
The estimated remaining time (minutes) for parts

Magazine change button Set tray part (position A)

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray part (position B)

30SYS-0970-E

112 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

When not using verification

Screen change button

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A" and "B" represent the position in which the tray unit-M is set on the feeder pallet (A: left, B: right).
Press the up and down arrows to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 10).
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting is complete, the red mark changes to green.

Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed

Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"B-1" is slot 1 of the tray unit set on the right. 
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot

Screen change button Set tray part (position A)

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray part (position B)

30SYS-0969-E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 113

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.9.2 Setting trays

Enable operation at the side to set trays and then follow the procedure below.

Removing trays
1. Open the tray unit-M door.

30SYS-0971

2. Raise the tray stopper.

Tray stopper

30SYS-0175E

3. Remove trays from slots which require resupply.

30SYS-0721

114 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Verifying tray parts

This work is only required when using verification.

1. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.

Kit Handy

30SYS-0157E

a. At Kit Handy or Kit Manager, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.

b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID.

Note
Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for details on tray verification. When using Fujitrax, refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the
Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for details on verifying trays.

2. The pickup start point for the tray parts can be specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy
Refer to "4.9.3 Specifying the tray pickup position"for details.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 115

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed on the operation panel.

30SYS-0176

Note
Gently set the tray into the magazine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also, ensure that the tray does not contact the stopper
located in the rear of the slot. If the tray contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.

2. Specify the first part to pick up here. Refer to "4.9.3 Specifying the tray pickup position" for details.

3. Press the button to set trays with the slot for which you are performing supply work selected.

Note
Steps 2 and 3 are not required if using verification.

30SYS-0972

4. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all necessary
trays have been set.

116 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

5. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.

30SYS-0973

6. Lower the tray stopper.

Tray stopper

30SYS-0178E

7. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-0179

Note
Gently close the door to prevent parts in the tray unit from becoming dislodged.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 117

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.9.3 Specifying the tray pickup position

It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray unit-M from Kit Handy
or on the machine from the pickup position screen.

Specifying the pickup point on the machine

The pickup point setting is accessed from the tray exchange guidance screen. From the tray exchange
guidance screen, select the pickup point pictogram and then press OK.

1. While tray exchange guidance is displayed, press the pictogram for the pickup start point.

30SYS-0974

2. Specify the new pickup point in X (columns) and Y (rows).

30SYS-0975

Note
The default values for pickup point settings are the current pickup point.

3. Press [OK] on the key pad when finished.

118 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

Specifying the pickup point from Kit Handy

Perform the following steps on a Kit Handy.

1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit.

2. Specify the column (X) and row (Y) for the first pickup cavity in Kit Handy.

30SYS-0171E

Note
If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.

3. Tap [OK].

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 119

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.9.4 Important points when inserting trays into the tray unit

1. Trays have direction. When setting trays in the tray unit-M, be careful to use the correct direction.

2. Gently open and close the doors so not to dislodge parts. If parts are dislodged, they may come out
of their pockets. For safety reasons, the doors are automatically locked and cannot be opened. Do
not try to open the doors when they are locked.

3. Do not use trays that have cutouts in the upper right corner.

Cutout

NXTMTU070E

4. At the side (stage) where parts supply guidance is displayed, operation guidance is displayed if
operation is not enabled at that side. Change to enable operation and then supply parts.

30SYS-0967

120 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.10 Setting auto-tools for DynaHeads (DX) heads

When using DX heads, set the auto-tools for the DX head in the module. The machine will stop with an error
if production is started without auto-tools being set.

1 2
3

30SYS-0833

1 Auto-tool R12
2 Auto-tool R4
3 Backup pin picker tool

Refer to the "DX Head Instruction Manual" for details on how to set auto-tools for the DX heads.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 121

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4.11 Other changeover

This section lists other types of changeover. If the units listed in this section have not been properly
prepared, changeover guidance will be displayed when the machine is turned on.

4.11.1 Supply unit type changeover

Exchange guidance

Exchange guidance

It is necessary to change to the part supply unit type displayed.

Side 1
Tray unit-LTW2  in side 1 is displayed.
Here, guidance to change from the tray unit-LTW2 to MFU-65

DP65
30SYS-0976-E

For details on exchanging supply units, refer to "4. Basic operation" in the mechanical reference.

122 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 4. Preparing for production

4.11.2 Parts camera type changeover

Exchange guidance

Procedures

Exchange guidance
It is necessary to change to the camera type displayed.
Here, guidance to change from the P04CL camera to the standard camera is displayed.

Procedures

The pictograms indicate required work. Start with the work on the left. 30SYS-0977-E

For details on exchanging the parts camera, refer to “7. Replacing parts” in the mechanical reference.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 123

4. Preparing for production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

124 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5. Performing production
This chapter explains details about production.

5.1 Starting production

After turning on the machine, push START at the main screen to begin production. When calibration is
complete, panels are loaded and production is commenced.

30SYS-0980

Note
The above screen displays when all changeover necessary for production has been performed. Refer to "4. Preparing for production" for details
on changeover.

30SYS-0981

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 125

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.2 Stopping operation

The method is different depending on if you want to stop operation immediately or if you want to wait for a
panel to complete production and then have the machine stop. Use the appropriate method for the action
that you wish to perform.

5.2.1 Stopping the machine after the current operation is

complete
Push CYCLE STOP while the machine is operating. The machine is stopped once the current operation is
completed.

30SYS-0982

126 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.2.2 Stopping after finishing and unloading the current panel

(stop after production of one board)

1. Press the button to unload panels during production. The machine continues operating until
production for the panel currently inside the machine is complete.

30SYS-0983

2. Once the loaded panels have been completed, they are unloaded to the next module and the stop
command is also sent to the module. The previous module display changes while it is waiting for
production to be completed.

Module 1 Module 2

30SYS-0984

Note
If the button is pressed again with the button to unload panels displayed, the stop command is canceled and normal production is resumed.

3. Production is continued in the following modules after loading the final panels until production of those
panels is completed.

Note
When unloading all panels from the line, press the button to unload panels at the first module in the line.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 127

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.2.3 Stopping the machine with EMERGENCY STOP

Push EMERGENCY to stop the machine in the case of an emergency. The machine stops quickly.

30SYS-0985

128 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.3 Restarting production

This section explains how to resume the production after stopping a machine which was performing
production.

5.3.1 Restarting after a cycle stop or after finishing and

unloading the current panel
The screen below displays requesting the operator to push START when production has been interrupted
by pushing CYCLE STOP or pressing the button to unload panels.

1. Push START.

2. When resuming production after a CYCLE STOP, production begins from the next production
sequence.

3. When production is resumed after the machine unloaded panels and stopped, the machine loads the
next panel and begins production.

30SYS-0986

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 129

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop

1. Ensure that the problem that resulted in the emergency stop has been resolved.

2. Release the EMERGENCY button by turning in the clockwise direction.

30SYS-0987

3. Push START.

30SYS-0986

130 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.4 Supplying feeder parts

There are two basic options for resupplying parts during production.

a. New part tape can be connected to the previous part tape for which parts are going to run out soon.

b. By exchanging feeders during production, new feeders can be set. (It is possible to supply parts
without stopping the machine by using alternate feeders.)

5.4.1 Splicing Parts

When parts are going to run out soon, guidance to perform splicing is displayed.

Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment

30SYS-0988-E

The proper splicing tools and items are necessary for performing splicing.

Tape cutter Splicing tool NXTSPL006

Three splicing modes are available when using verification. Each method uses a different procedure to
verify parts.

Without DID mode 1 point verification mode 2 point verification mode

When not using verification, ensure that the parts to be connected are correct and then connect the carrier
tapes together.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 131

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Verify parts (When using verification)

1. Check the parts out warning that is displayed at the operation panel of the machine, the status screen
of Kit Manager, or the part status screen of Kit Handy.

2. Prepare a new parts reel that contains the same type of parts as the parts that are currently being
placed.

3. On the PDA, tap the Windows mark to display the start menu. Tap [Kit Handy] and the log on screen
is displayed.

4. Enter the user ID and tap [OK]. It is possible to also select the user ID. The Kit Handy menu is
displayed.

5. Click [Parts Status List].

6. Enter or scan the name of the machine for which splicing will be performed and click [OK].

7. In the Kit Handy screen, select [Mode] - [Splicing].

8. When using 1 point verification or without DID mode, follow the procedure below.

a. All feeder positions that require splicing display at Kit Handy. Therefore, tap the feeder position to be
spliced.

b. Scan the DID for the new reel or the part barcode.

9. When using 2 point verification mode, follow the procedure below.

a. Scan the DID of the reel being used in production with Kit Handy.

b. Continue by scanning the DID of the new reel.

10. After the DID or part barcode has been scanned, splicing can be performed if no problem was found
during the splicing check. However, if an error occurs, then the new parts reel and the parts reel
currently loaded on the feeder do not match and splicing cannot be performed.

132 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Connecting carrier tapes

1. Remove the old reel and unwind the remaining tape.

DID

Reel holder

30SYS-0135E

2. Using the splicing cutter, cut the tape at the correct position based on the tape pitch after the last part
on the tape. Ensure that the cover tape is facing up when cutting the tape.

(P2) 2-pitch
(P2) 2-pitch

Feed direction
(P4) 4-pitch (P4) 4-pitch Feed direction
NXTSPL001

3. If not using verification, ensure that the parts are the same type.

4. Cut the new tape on the new reel at the correct position based on the tape pitch just before the first
part in the tape. Ensure that the cover tape is facing up when cutting the tape.

5. Ensure that the cover tape can be peeled back from the starting point without a problem by peeling
the tape on the new tape back for about 1 mm and then sticking it back down.

New tape
1 mm NXTSPL007

Note
Do not peel too far back or parts may be lost.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 133

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6. Put a splicing chip in the splicing tool.

Splicing chip NXTSPL002a

7. Place the existing and new carrier tape onto the splicing tool with the cover tape at the top.

a. Ensure that the end of the existing carrier tape is at the middle of the splicing tool and then secure it
with the holding clip so that it does not move.

b. Ensure that the start of the new carrier tape is at the middle of the splicing tool and then secure it with
the holding clip so that it does not move.

Holding clips

New tape

Existing tape
NXTSPL003a

8. Squeeze the grips for the splicing tool quickly to set the splicing chip.

Handle

NXTSPL004a

Note
When squeezing the grips, keep fingers and other body parts away from the splicing area to avoid injury.

134 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

9. Secure the joined carrier tape using the splicing cover tape.

Splicing cover tape

30SYS-0137E

Note
Be sure to use the correct size for the cover tape based on the width of the tape being spliced.

10. Gently peel the blue film of the splicing cover tape off the spliced tape. A yellow band of tape should
remain on the spliced tape.

11. Move the holding levers on the splicing tool so the tape can be removed and gently remove the spliced
tape from the splicing tool.

12. Gently wind up any old length of tape onto the new reel and set the reel on the feeder reel holder.

30SYS-0138E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 135

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

13. If using verification, tap the displayed message at Kit Handy to inform Nexim that splicing has been
completed.

Note
When using Fuji Flexa, this is reported to Fujitrax.

This completes the splicing procedure.

When using the splicing jigs shown below, refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Splicing Detection Unit
Instruction Manual for details.

AA9DA01 AA94Z02 AA95A02

AA94T02
01SYS-0353

Caution regarding splicing carrier tape

Splicing is a procedure that should only be performed when the number of remaining parts in the carrier is
very small. If splicing is performed when there are still lots of parts left in the carrier tape, then the diameter
of the tape roll may exceed the diameter of the parts reel when the carrier tape is taken up.

Carrier Tape Carrier Tape

Parts reel Parts reel 01SYS-0332-E

If the reel is set in the reel holder with the carrier tape in this condition then the tape may interfere with the
feeder, and the loose tape may get twisted as it is moved forwards, causing indexing problems.

Ensure that the diameter of the tape roll does not exceed the diameter of the parts reel.

136 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Important point when using the free allocation function

When the free allocation function is being used, both the slot at which the feeder is actually set and the slot
specified in the job are displayed at the parts out warning screen in Kit Handy. Perform splicing for the
feeder displayed in the [Allocation] column.

Slot with parts out condition

01SYS-0188E

In the screen shown above, the feeder for which a parts out warning occurred is set at 1-1-20-0. However,
slot 1-1-11-0 is specified in the job.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 137

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.4.2 Exchanging feeders

Feeder exchange guidance displays when parts run out during production.

There are two types of feeder exchange guidance: detail view and list view. Either of them requires setting
the feeders in the displayed slots.

In order to display the applicable slot list, press the button to display feeder set information to switch the
screen and then select the button to display error feeders.

Feeder information

Slot information
Slot status (indicated by icons)
Stage number
Slot number
Parts out warning time (min)
Feeder name
Index pitch
Width
Error code
Guide type
Detail view Device comment

Exit
Error feeder

Slot information
Slot status
Stage number
Slot number
Index pitch
Width
Device comment

List view

30SYS-0989-E

Note
Exchange feeders by following the instructions in the guidance. It is also possible to perform feeder exchange during production.

Procedures differ depending on whether or not verification is used. When not using verification, check the
parts out on the operation panel and then exchange the feeder.

138 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Verify parts (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

1. Check the parts out warning that is displayed at the operation panel of the machine, the status screen
of Kit Manager, or the part condition screen of Kit Handy.

2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being placed. Set the
new parts reel in a feeder.

3. Use Kit Manager to create an ID, or use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to perform quick verification. (The
machine will check the part type once the feeder has been set on the feeder pallet.)

Note
When using AVL data, be sure to create an ID if the new parts have a different part number than the current parts.

Removing feeders
1. Verify that a parts out condition is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status screen in Kit
Manager, or the parts status screen in Kit Handy.

2. Remove the feeder which has run out of parts. Refer to "3.12 Removing feeders from a feeder pallet"
for details on removing feeders.

30SYS-0142

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 139

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Setting feeders
1. Set the feeder with new parts into the slot. Refer to "3.11 Setting feeders on a feeder pallet" for details
on setting feeders.

30SYS-0143E

2. The buttons to set feeders is displayed for slots in which feeders have been set. Press the button to
set feeders.

30SYS-0900

Note
The operation above is not necessary when using verification.

140 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.4.3 Replacing feeders (tray unit-LTW(2))

The following feeder exchange guidance displays when parts run out during production when using feeders
set on a tray unit-LTW(2) to supply parts.

Slot information
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment

30SYS-0990-E

The method for setting feeders is the same as setting on feeder pallets. Correctly insert the feeders into the
feeder slots for the tray unit-LTW(2).

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 141

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LTW(2)

On a module with a tray unit-LTW(2), if parts run out for feeders and trays at the same time, tray part supply
guidance is displayed first.

Complete setting trays or change to feeder set guidance by pressing the button to set feeders.

30SYS-0991

If tray replenishment is completed for one magazine and production can be continued, feeder part supply
guidance is displayed. In this case too, change to feeder set guidance by pressing the button to set feeders.

30SYS-0992

142 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.4.4 Replacing feeders when using dynamic alternate feeders

If dynamic alternate feeders are used, production can be continued even if a feeder runs out of parts by
changing to pickup from a feeder that has replacement parts set in a different slot.

Two different modes can be selected when using dynamic alternate feeders. Settings for the modes are
specified in Nexim.

Note
When not using Nexim, Fujitrax Verifier is required.

Setting Description
Look For Removable The alternate feeder can be used when a condition such as a parts out
warning occurs for the feeder currently being used in production, or
when a problem occurs during parts pick up.
Keep Alt Feeder The alternate feeder can be use regardless of the condition of the feeder
currently being used for production.

Replace the feeder.

1. Verify that a parts out warning is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status screen in Kit
Manager, or the parts status screen in Kit Handy.

2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being used for
production. Set the new parts reel in a feeder.

3. Use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to verify the parts. (The machine will check the parts type once the
feeder has been set on the feeder pallet.)

Note
Create a different ID if the new parts have a different part number than the current parts.

4. Set the feeder with the verified parts into an empty slot on the module.

5. Check that the status color for the set slot on the operation panel has turned green. If it turns green,
verification was completed successfully and the feeder status is changed into an alternate feeder.

6. Once the original feeder runs out of parts, the machine starts to use the alternate feeder, so remove
the original feeder.

From this point, procedures differ according to the mode selected for dynamic alternate devices.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 143

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

When [Look For Removable] is selected

1. The guidance area changes to display guidance for moving the alternate feeder to the original feeder
position. Remove the alternate feeder. At this point, the slot status display for the original slot will begin
to blink in red.

30SYS-0993

Note
When there are multiple alternate feeders, only remove one of the alternate feeders. If two or more feeders are removed, the feeder exchange
guidance will not display correctly.

2. Set the removed alternate feeder in the original feeder position. The slot status for the set feeder turns
green if verification is OK and production can continue.

Caution
When removing the alternate feeder (removable feeder) and setting in the slot for the original feeder, make sure to perform this within
the [Miss Prevention Timer] time limit set at Central Server. If the action is not completed within this time limit, the feeder status
becomes "No ID" and parts verification must be performed again before it can be used.

When [Keep Alt Feeder] is selected

1. Parts pick up is performed using the alternate feeder until a new feeder is set into the original slot.

2. Once a new feeder is set into the original slot, pickup is changed to be from the feeder that was set in
the original slot.

144 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.4.5 Exchanging feeders when using the free allocation

function
This section contains information about removing and inserting feeders when using the free allocation
function.

Parts out conditions that occur during production can be checked at either of the screens listed below.

• Machine operation panel

• Kit Handy

• Kit Manager

Setting guidance in the operation screen is the same as for normal operation. Also, if a feeder is already set
in the slot which is specified in the job, then an asterisk (*) is displayed in the [Slot] column.

30SYS-0994

Note
If a feeder is not already set in the slot which is specified in the job, then a slot number is displayed. In the screen shown above, slot 9 is
displayed, but the feeder can be set in any slot.

The feeder exchange guidance which is displayed at Kit Handy and Kit Manager shows both the actual slot
at which the feeder is set and the slot which is specified in the job.

Slot with parts out condition

1-1-1-0 1-1-2-0

Slot number

01SYS-0189E

The screen shown above indicates that a parts out condition has occurred for the feeder set in slot 1. This
feeder is specified for slot 2 in the job.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 145

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.5 Replenishing trays on a tray unit-LTW(2)

There are four main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-LTW.

• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Using tray verification)

• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Not using tray verification)

• Supplying trays parts to the supply magazine (magazine A or magazine B).

• Supply parts during production using dynamic alternate trays

No matter the mode being used, supply tray parts based on the tray supply guidance displayed on the
operation panel.

Note
For cautions when inserting trays into magazines, refer to "4.8.4 Caution when inserting trays into the tray unit".

146 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax

Verifier)

CAUTION 39
• If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper, the tray drawer and magazine
may be damaged.

Check the parts supply guidance.

Magazine change buttons

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
Press the up and down arrows to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 12).
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting is complete, the red mark changes to green.

Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed

Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.

"A-2-1" represents the upper magazine, slot 2, subslot 1.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot
 to run out is displayed.
The estimated remaining time (minutes) for parts

Magazine change buttons Set tray parts (magazine A)

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B)

30SYS-0995-E

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the procedure below.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 147

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTW(2). There are two front doors on the unit. Open the door for
the area that you are supplying trays.

30SYS-0960

2. Check the slots to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition, the LED for
the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen flashes.

LED 01SYS-0246

3. Open the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0961

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.

148 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0736E

Note
With the tray drawer stopper lowered, tray drawers can be pulled out about halfway. This is designed so that the operators can check the part
condition. When supplying parts, be sure to raise the tray drawer stopper.

4. Remove the tray drawer from the slot that parts are to be supplied.

01SYS-0719

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 149

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Verifying tray parts

1. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.

Kit Handy

30SYS-0157E

a. At Kit Handy or Kit Manager, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.

b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID. If tray verification with
position check is being used, scan the FIDL (tray drawer) and the DID (tray).

Note
Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for details on tray verification. When using Fujitrax, refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the
Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for details on verifying trays.

2. The pickup start point for the tray parts can be specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy
Refer to "4.8.3 Tray pickup start point" for details.

150 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.

Tray Tray drawer

Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2

2. Gently set the tray drawer in the appropriate slot.

01SYS-0239

Note
Gently set the tray drawer into the magazine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.

Note
If you wish to change the supply order, change the selected slot on the operation panel and then set a tray.

3. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all necessary
trays have been set.

4. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.

30SYS-0996

Note
It is possible to enter production even though not all of the trays have been set as long as all the trays necessary for production have been set.
When this condition is fulfilled, guidance for pushing COMPLETE is displayed as shown below.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 151

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5. Close the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0962

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to lower the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0737E

6. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-0963

Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW(2).

7. If you are using tray verification with position check, the machine reads the FIDL of the tray drawer. If
the wrong part type is loaded or if parts are not set in the tray cavities correctly, tray set guidance
redisplays. If this occurs, reset the tray.

152 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax

Verifier)

CAUTION 39
• If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper, the tray drawer and magazine
may be damaged.

Check the parts supply guidance.

Magazine change buttons

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
Press the up and down arrows to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 12).
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting is complete, the red mark changes to green.

Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed

Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"A-2-1" represents the upper magazine, slot 2, subslot 1.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot.

Magazine change buttons Set tray parts (magazine A)

Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B)

30SYS-0997-E

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the procedure below.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 153

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTW(2). There are two front doors on the unit. Open the door for
the area that you are supplying trays.

30SYS-0960

2. Check the slots to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition, the LED for
the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen flashes.

LED 01SYS-0246

3. Open the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0961

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.

154 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0736E

Note
With the tray drawer stopper lowered, tray drawers can be pulled out about halfway. This is designed so that the operators can check the part
condition. When supplying parts, be sure to raise the tray drawer stopper.

4. Remove the tray drawer from the slot that parts are to be supplied.

01SYS-0719

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 155

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.

Tray Tray drawer

Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2

2. Gently set the tray drawer in the appropriate slot.

01SYS-0239

Note
Gently set the tray drawer into the magazine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.

Note
If you wish to change the supply order, change the selected slot on the operation panel and then set a tray.

3. If it is necessary to specify the tray pickup start point, specify it at this time. Refer to "4.8.3 Tray pickup
start point" for details.

4. Press the button to set trays with the slot for which you are performing supply work selected.

30SYS-0998

5. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all necessary
trays have been set.

156 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

6. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.

30SYS-0996

Note
It is possible to enter production even though not all of the trays have been set as long as all the trays necessary for production have been set.
When this condition is fulfilled, guidance for pushing COMPLETE is displayed as shown below.

7. Close the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0962

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to lower the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0737E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 157

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-0963

Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW(2).

158 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.5.3 Guidance display and procedure (when supplying parts

to the supply magazine)

CAUTION 39
• If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper, the tray drawer and magazine
may be damaged.

The following are the procedures for supplying parts when using magazine B (the lower magazine) as the
supply magazine.

The procedures are the same when using magazine A (the upper magazine) as the supply magazine. For
magazine A, use the following procedures but just change the supply position to the upper section (open
the upper door).

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)

Press the up and down arrows to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 9).
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
When using a tray unit that supports 1.5 inch tall parts and parts that are taller than 25.4 mm are set, 
slots from 9 to 12 are not displayed.

Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting is complete, the red mark changes to green.

Alternate tray Alternate tray (already set)

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.

Slot 12 in magazine B is used for ejecting drawers.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are displayed for
the currently selected slot.
01SYS-0999-E

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the procedure below.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 159

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTW(2). Open the lower level door.

30SYS-0731

2. Open the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0961

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0732E

Note
With the tray drawer stopper lowered, tray drawers can be pulled out about halfway. This is designed so that the operators can check the part
condition. When supplying parts, be sure to raise the tray drawer stopper.

160 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

3. Remove the tray drawer from slot 12.

30SYS-0733

4. Press the button with the check. The drawer removal guidance is cleared.

30SYS-1000

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 161

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Check the slots to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition, the LED for
the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen flashes.

LED

01SYS-0320

2. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.

Tray Tray drawer

Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2

3. Gently set the tray drawer in the appropriate slot.

01SYS-0321

Note
When setting the tray drawer in the slot, set it gently so as to not jar the trays.

4. If it is necessary to specify the tray pickup start point, specify it at this time. Refer to "4.8.3 Tray pickup
start point" for details.

162 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5. Press the button to set trays.

30SYS-1001

6. Close the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0962

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to lower the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0734E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 163

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-1002

Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW(2).

164 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.5.4 Guidance display and procedure (for dynamic alternate

tray resupply)

CAUTION 39
• If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper, the tray drawer and magazine
may be damaged.

The following are the procedures for supplying parts when using magazine A (the upper magazine) as the
supply magazine.

The procedures are the same when using magazine B (the lower magazine) as the supply magazine. For
magazine B, use the following procedures but just change the supply position to the lower section (open the
lower door).

Magazine change buttons

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
"S" indicates the supply magazine.
Select slots by pressing the up/down arrows. 1 to 12 shown here are the slot numbers. 
The background color of the selected slot changes to blue.
The upper slot(s) in magazine A are the location to which drawers with empty trays are moved. The
number of slots used for storing empty trays should be enough to hold the tray in the production magazine
that occupies the largest number of slots.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting trays in a slot is completed,
the red mark changes to green.
Alternate tray Alternate tray (already set)
Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"A-1-2" represents the upper magazine, slot 1, subslot 2.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) aredisplayed for the currently selected slot.
Set feeder parts
Magazine change buttons Set tray parts (magazine A)
Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (magazine B)

30SYS-1003-E

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the procedure below.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 165

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LTW(2). Open the upper level door.

30SYS-0960

2. Open the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0961

Note
This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of a tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

01SYS-0237

Note
With the tray drawer stopper lowered, tray drawers can be pulled out about halfway. This is designed so that the operators can check the part
condition. When supplying parts, be sure to raise the tray drawer stopper.

166 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

3. Remove the tray drawers from the removal slot.

Empty tray
Drawer

01SYS-0495E

Verifying tray parts

1. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.

Kit Handy

30SYS-0157E

a. Check the part to be supplied at Kit Handy or Kit Manager.

b. Scan the FIDL (drawer) and DID (tray) using Kit Handy or a handy scanner.

Note
Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for details on tray verification. When using Fujitrax, refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the
Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for details on verifying trays.

Note
When supplying parts on a drawer in which only one subslot is being used, scan the "-NOPARTS-" barcode attached to the drawer for the
subslot without parts.

2. The pickup start point for the tray parts can be specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy
Refer to "4.8.3 Tray pickup start point" for details.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 167

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.

Drawer

Subslot 1
Tray
Subslot 2 01SYS-0496E

2. Gently set the tray drawer in an empty slot.

Drawer

01SYS-0497E

Note
When setting the tray drawer in the slot, set it gently so as to not jar the trays.

Note
The tray drawer cannot be set in the slot(s) for storing empty drawers. If a tray drawer is set in the slot(s) for storing empty trays, guidance to
remove the drawer displays.

Note
Tray drawers can be set in any empty slot except for the slot(s) used for storing empty trays. The most efficient way when using the dynamic
alternate tray function is to set the tray drawers for parts that are due to run out first in the empty slot nearest the top of the unit.

A A Removal If parts outs occur in the order A, B, C, set

Removal trays in open slots in order starting from the
B
A A
C
B
C
Production Supply
magazine magazine 01SYS-0506E

3. Check the warnings for magazines to be removed given at Kit Handy or Kit Manager. If more trays
need to be set, repeat the steps performed up to this point to verify the other parts.

168 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

4. Close the shutter retainer.

30SYS-0962

5. This work is for a tray unit-LTW2. In case of the tray unit-LTW, use the knob on the drawer stopper to
lower the stopper.

Drawer
stopper

Knob

30SYS-0737E

6. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-0963

Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW(2).

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 169

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Supplying tray parts in advance

When using the dynamic alternate tray function, parts for the next tray due to run out can also be supplied
when supplying parts for the current tray.

When using Kit Handy

1. Display either the [Parts Status List] or [Device Check] window.

2. Check the [Mag. Time Left] column. This displays the time remaining until the next tray parts need to
be supplied.

Note
The sort function can be used to change the order (either descending or ascending).

01SYS-0502E

3. Verify the relevant parts and then set the tray drawer in an empty slot.

4. Tap the refresh display button in Kit Handy to update the [Mag. Time Left] information.

01SYS-0503E

Note
Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for details on how to use the Kit Handy. When using Fujitrax, refer to section "3. Operating Kit Handy" in
the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for details on verifying trays.

170 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

When using Kit Manager

1. Open the device window in Kit Manager.

2. Check the [Mag. Time Left] column. This displays the time remaining until the next tray parts need to
be supplied.

Note
The sort function can be used to change the order (either descending or ascending).

01SYS-0504E

3. Verify the relevant parts and then set the tray drawer in an empty slot.

Note
Refer to "2. Operating Kit Manager" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for more details on using Kit Manager.

Guidance for removing tray drawers when supplying tray parts

When using the dynamic alternate tray function, tray parts can be set in any empty slot in the supply
magazine.

However, guidance to remove tray drawers displays in the following situations. Remove the tray drawers as
prompted to by the guidance and insert them in another slot.

a. A set tray is too tall and protrudes into the slot(s) for storing empty trays

30SYS-1005

Note
The machine checks the height of trays after COMPLETE is pushed. If the height of a tray set immediately below the slot(s) used for storing
empty trays is detected to be protruding into the slot(s) used for storing empty trays, guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 171

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

b. A tray is set in the slot(s) for storing empty trays

30SYS-1006

Note
If a tray is set in the slot(s) for storing empty trays, the status does not become "Set OK", and guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.

c. A tray is set in a slot specified to be used by another tray

30SYS-1007

Note
If a tray is set in a slot specified to be used by another tray (or if not enough slots are left for a certain tray part), the status does not become
"Set OK", and guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.

172 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.5.5 When using the supply reservation function

Parts supply for the tray unit-LTW(2) can be performed efficiently by following the guidance displayed at the
operation panel of the machine. However, even if guidance to supply tray parts is not being displayed at the
operation panel, it is possible to efficiently supply tray parts by pushing SUPPLY PARTS. This function
should be used in cases like the one shown below.

• If it is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator wishes to perform
part supply for the alternate tray now in order to prevent a parts out condition from occurring while
he/she is gone.

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the procedure below.

1. When the machine is performing automatic operation, push SUPPLY PARTS. The SUPPLY PARTS
button will begin to flash.

30SYS-1008

2. Guidance for supplying tray parts will be displayed at the machine operation panel. The magazine of
the tray unit-LTW(2) will retract so that parts supply is possible.

3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. Refer to "5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure (when
using Fujitrax Verifier)" or "5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier)"
for how to set trays.

4. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-0963

Note
Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW(2).

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 173

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.6 Replenishing trays on a tray unit-M

There are two main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-M.

• Supplying tray parts to the slots at which parts have run out. (Using tray verification)

• Supplying tray parts to the slots at which parts have run out. (Not using tray verification)

No matter the mode being used, supply tray parts based on the tray supply guidance displayed on the
operation panel.

Note
For cautions when inserting trays into magazines, refer to "4.9.4 Important points when inserting trays into the tray unit".

5.6.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Check the parts supply guidance.

Magazine change buttons

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A" and "B" represent the position in which the tray unit-M is set on the feeder pallet (A: left, B: right).
Press the up and down arrows to select a slot (slot numbers 1 to 10). The background color
of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slot designated by the red mark. The red mark will change to a green mark
once a tray has been set.
Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"A-1" is slot 1 of the tray unit set on the left.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are displayed for the currently selected slot.
The estimated remaining time (minutes) for parts to run out is displayed.

Magazine change buttons

Set feeder parts
Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray part (position A)
Set tray part (position B)

30SYS-1009-E

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the procedure below.

174 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Removing trays
1. Open the tray unit-M door.

30SYS-0971

2. Raise the tray stopper.

Tray stopper

30SYS-0175E

3. Remove the empty tray from the slot to be supplied with parts.

30SYS-0721

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 175

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Verifying tray parts

1. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.

Kit Handy

30SYS-0157E

a. At Kit Handy or Kit Manager, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.

b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID.

Note
Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for details on tray verification. When using Fujitrax, refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the
Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for details on verifying trays.

2. The pickup start point for the tray parts can be specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy
Refer to "4.9.3 Specifying the tray pickup position" for details.

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed on the operation panel.

30SYS-0176

Note
Gently set the tray into the slot to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also, ensure that the tray does not contact the stopper located
in the rear of the slot. If the tray contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.

2. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all necessary
trays have been set.

176 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

3. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the empty trays of
other parts.

Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present
the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out -
10 NXTMTU098E

4. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but replenishment is not required.

5. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.

30SYS-1010

6. Lower the tray stopper.

Tray stopper

30SYS-0178E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 177

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is continued.

30SYS-0179

Note
Gently close the door to prevent parts in the tray unit from becoming dislodged.

178 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.6.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Check the parts supply guidance.

Magazine change buttons

Operation guidance
Tray information

Slots

Slots
"A" and "B" represent the position in which the tray unit-M is set on the feeder pallet (A: left, B: right).
Press the up and down arrows to select a slot (slot numbers 1 to 10). The background color
of the selected slot changes to blue.
Supply trays to the slot designated by the red mark. The red mark will change to a green mark
once a tray has been set.
Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate tray Tray parts already set

Operation guidanceTray information

Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.

The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
"A-1" is slot 1 of the tray unit set on the left.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are displayed for the currently selected slot.

Magazine change buttons

Set feeder parts
Press the buttons to change the screen. Set tray parts (position A)
Set tray parts (position B)

30SYS-1011-E

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the procedure below.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 179

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Removing trays
1. Open the tray unit-M door.

30SYS-0971

2. Raise the tray stopper.

Tray stopper

NXTOPE221E

3. Remove the empty tray from the slot to be supplied with parts.

01SYS-0709

180 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed on the operation panel.

30SYS-0176

Note
Gently set the tray into the slot to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also, ensure that the tray does not contact the stopper located
in the rear of the slot. If the tray contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.

2. If it is necessary to specify the first pickup point, then specify it at this time. Refer to "4.9.3 Specifying
the tray pickup position" for details.

3. Push OK with the slot for which you are performing supply work selected.

30SYS-1012

4. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all necessary
trays have been set.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 181

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the empty trays of
other parts.

Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present
the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out -
10 NXTMTU098E

6. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but replenishment is not required.

7. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.

30SYS-1010

8. Lower the tray stopper.

Tray stopper

30SYS-0178E

182 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

9. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is continued.

30SYS-0179

Note
Gently close the door to prevent parts in the tray unit from becoming dislodged.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 183

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.6.3 When using the supply reservation function

Parts supply for the tray unit-M can be performed efficiently by following the guidance displayed at the
operation panel of the machine. However, even if guidance to supply tray parts is not being displayed at the
operation panel, it is possible to efficiently supply tray parts by pushing SUPPLY PARTS. This function
should be used in cases like the one shown below.

• If it is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator wishes to perform
part supply for the alternate tray now in order to prevent a parts out condition from occurring while
he/she is gone.

1. When the machine is performing automatic operation, push SUPPLY PARTS. The SUPPLY PARTS
button will begin to flash.

SUPPLY PARTS button

30SYS-0183E

2. Guidance for supplying tray parts will be displayed at the machine operation panel. The magazine of
the tray unit-M will retract so that parts supply is possible.

3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. Refer to "5.6.1 Guidance display and procedure (when
using Fujitrax Verifier)" or "5.6.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier)"
for how to set trays.

4. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.

30SYS-0179

184 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

5.7 Multi production operation (AIMEX-3)

Multi production is a mode in which production is performed independently in a twin robot module, with one
robot producing panels at side 1 and the other robot producing panels at side 2.

30SYS-1123

The following conditions are required for operation.

• The machine must have a double conveyor.

• A job must be sent to each lane.

Refer to the "AIMEX Multi Production Operation Manual" on the supplied media for details on multi
production.

5.7.1 Operation screens

The operation panel displays the same information in the main area as when performing normal production.
However, the information displayed in the status area differs in the following ways.

Status area display

30SYS-1124

The production types on each side are displayed in the status area in the same manner as normal
production.

• The number in the pictograms indicates the side number.

• The pictograms with blue background are for the sides for which operation is maintained. The part
supply screen shown above is the guidance for side 2.

• Use the ENABLE/LOCK switch to change operation side.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 185

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Switching operation panels

Turn the ENABLE/LOCK switch on the operation panel to ENABLE. By turning this switch, operation is
enabled at that side.

Side 1 ENABLE LOCK Side 2

30SYS-1125

Note
Here, feeder part supply guidance is displayed at side 1, and at side 2 production is being continued.

5.7.2 Clearing errors during operation

This section explains how to clear errors when they occur during multi production.

1. On the operation panel of the side that the error occurred, error guidance is displayed. Error
information can be checked by touching the button for displaying the error details.

Note
Production is continued at the lane for the side on which the error did not occur.

Side 1 Side 2 30SYS-1126

186 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

2. Push CYCLE STOP. Production is stopped for both lanes.

30SYS-1127

3. Guidance to clear the error is displayed. Perform the necessary measures to clear the error.

30SYS-1128

5.7.3 Important points

1. The front door cannot be opened while production is being performed at one lane.

2. Multi production and normal production cannot be performed simultaneously in one line.

3. The automatic changeover function cannot be used during conveyor only function when a module is
non-functional (breakdown mode).

4. Operation to complete the current panel, unload it, and then stop, is not possible.

5. Jobs for multi production cannot be used when in PAM mode or in feeder pallet levelness measuring
mode.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 187

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.8 Clearing errors

The error screen displays upon the occurrence of an error.

5.8.1 Error guidance

Cause of the error

Screen change buttons

Information

Procedures for
clearing the error

This screen is an example of error guidance.

Cause of the error

A pictogram representing the cause of the error or the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
This screen indicates a nozzle that cannot be returned is attached to the holder.

[Seek Number] indicates the cause of the error.

Error information for the displayed [Seek Number] can be displayed by performing an error search
in Accessory Software.

Information
Information such as the status of the I/O at the place where the error occurred and the name
of the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
Procedures for clearing the error
Displays procedures for clearing the error.

Screen change buttons

Error details (scenario)
Press the buttons to change the screen.
Error details (unit information)

01SYS-1013-E

1. Refer to the displayed pictograms and then clear the cause of the error.

Note
Contact a member of the maintenance staff or technical engineer and ask them to fix the error.

188 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 5. Performing production

2. Push READY ON to proceed with production, if necessary.

30SYS-1014

5.8.2 Displaying error details

While the error guidance is displayed, press an error details button to display detailed information about the
error.

There are two error details buttons, scenario and unit. Move between the two as needed.

Scenario Unit

30SYS-1087

If the error guidance button is pressed while error details are displayed, the error guidance screen is
displayed again. It is also possible to display the error history from the error details screen.

It is possible to display the error details in English, Chinese and Japanese. Specify the language to be
displayed in the machine configuration settings from Accessory Software.

42SYS-0084

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 189

5. Performing production SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5.9 Saving trace data

When an error stop occurs, it helps to troubleshoot the problem if trace data is saved.

Perform the following procedures when the main screen, waiting for a command screen, or an error screen
is displayed.

1. Push and hold CYCLE STOP for 10 seconds.

10 seconds

30SYS-1121

Note
While trace data is being saved, the following is displayed on the operation panel and operation cannot be performed.

30SYS-1122

2. When the display changes, the trace data has been saved.

3. Use the [Acquire Trace] command from Accessory Software to acquire the trace data.

01SYS-1058-E

190 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

6. Using manual commands

In this chapter, manual commands used to perform maintenance and other special operations are
explained.

6.1 Items displayed in the menu

Switch from the main screen to the manual mode menu. Refer to "3.4 Displaying the manual mode screen"
for details on changing screens.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 30SYS-1015

No. Command name Function

1 Clean When this command is used, the MFU-65 or tray unit-
LTW(2) attached to the machine is unclamped.
2 Position head This command is used to position the head in different
locations to make work easier such as when lubricating.
3 Manage production This command is used to check the pickup position for
parts.
4 Diagnostics This command is used when upgrading control
software.
5 Remove panels This command is used to remove panels from the
conveyor.
6 Exchange This command is used when exchanging the head or
MFU-65 or ejecting the nozzles.
7 Adjust This command is used at machines loaded with the
feeder type brush unit. This is also used when removing
the hybrid calibration jig parts.
8 Information This command is used to display information about the
module, base, and head.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 191

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.2 Cleaning command

CAUTION 66
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to body parts if the door is not
completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come back down and
injure any body parts in the way.

This command is designed to be used when cleaning is to be performed on the machine.

1. Press [Clean].

30SYS-1016

2. Press the perform command button.

30SYS-1017

3. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

• After this, guidance displays at the operation panel to set a parts supply unit.

30SYS-1018

4. Open the front door.

192 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

5. Perform any necessary maintenance.

6. Close the front door.

7. Set the parts supply unit in the machine.

8. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine will draw the parts supply unit in and clamp it.

30SYS-1020

Note
The red frames in the pictogram indicate that the parts supply unit is not pushed in enough. When the red frames in three locations switch off,
the machine clamps the parts supply unit automatically and there is no need to use buttons on the operation panel.

9. After this operation is completed, the screen returns to the one from step 2.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 193

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.3 Position head command

Use this command to move the head to different positions to enable easier access to perform actions such
as cleaning and lubrication. There are two possible locations to position the head with this command.

Caution
Power to the head is not turned off when using this command. Do not remove the head.

a. Single robot machine

• Moves the robot to the front of side 1.

• Moves the robot to the center of the machine.

Side 2 Side 2

Side 1 Side 1 30SYS-0277E

b. Twin robot machines

• Moves the front and rear robot to side 1 and side 2 respectively.

• Moves the front and rear robot close to the center of the machine.

Side 2 Side 2

Side 1 Side 1 30SYS-0276E

1. Press [Position head].

30SYS-1021

194 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

2. Select the head retract position.

a. Single robot machine

30SYS-1022

b. Twin robot machines

30SYS-1023

3. The main screen for retracting the head is displayed. Push START to begin moving the head.

30SYS-1024

4. When the head has finished moving, the operation panel returns to the screen for selecting the head
retract position.

a. Press the production button to return to the main screen for production.

b. Press the manual command button to return to the manual mode menu.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 195

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.4 Manage production command

This command is used for managing production.

1. Press [Manage production].

30SYS-1027

2. The following command selection screen displays.

30SYS-1028

No. Command name Function

1 Clear produced quantity (Clear the This clears the production quantity of the panels
quantity of produced panels) displayed on the screen.

196 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

6.4.1 Clear produced quantity

Use this command to clear the number of panels that have been produced to enable management of the
quantity of panels produced.

This command only clears the display of the quantity of panels produced. This does not affect production
or Profiler information.

1. Press [Clear produced quantity].

30SYS-1025

2. Press the button to clear the produced quantity of panels. The display of the quantity of panels
produced is cleared.

30SYS-1026

Note
If you do not want to clear the displayed panel production quantity, press a button at the top of the screen to change the screen.

Note
If there is a panel on the conveyor in the module, the lane icon for that lane is yellow. The display of the quantity of panels produced is also
cleared in this case.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 197

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.5 Diagnosis command

Perform machine self-diagnosis before upgrading the machine software. Refer to "10. Upgrading Software"
for details on upgrading software.

Note
If software is upgraded without performing self-diagnosis, calibration information stored in the machine will be discarded. When this occurs,
calibration data has to be measured again.

1. Press [Diagnostics].

30SYS-1029

2. Press the perform command button.

30SYS-1030

Caution
The following icon displays at the screen when diagnosis begins. Do not operate the machine during this time.

30SYS-1031

198 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

3. Wait until diagnosis is complete and then perform any necessary operations.

30SYS-1032

a. Press the production button to return to the main screen for production.

b. Press the manual command button to return to the manual mode menu.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 199

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.6 Remove panels command

CAUTION 66
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to body parts if the door is not
completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come back down and
injure any body parts in the way.

This command is designed to be used when removing a panel from the machine.

1. Press [Remove panels].

30SYS-1033

2. The main screen for removing a panel is displayed. Push START.

30SYS-1034

3. Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

30SYS-1035

200 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

4. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

5. Open the front door.

Caution
Read CAUTION 66.

6. Remove the panels from the lane.

Note
The top plate on the rail of the lane can be slid back to allow easy removal of the panel. After removing the panel, be sure to slide this plate
back into the original position.

30SYS-0295

7. After removing the panel, press the perform command button.

30SYS-1037

8. Close the front door.

9. Set the parts supply unit in the machine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 201

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

10. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine will draw the parts supply unit in and clamp it.

30SYS-1038

Note
The red frames in the pictogram indicate that the parts supply unit is not pushed in enough. When the red frames in three locations switch off,
the machine clamps the parts supply unit automatically and there is no need to use buttons on the operation panel.

11. After this operation is completed, the screen returns to the one from step 2.

202 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

6.7 Exchange command

This command is designed to be used when exchanging heads, feeder pallets, backup plates, or to
automatically remove the nozzles from the head on the machine.

1. Press [Exchange].

30SYS-1039

2. The following command selection screen displays.

1 2 3

4 30SYS-1040

No. Command name Function

1 Device unit This unclamps the parts supply unit which is set in the
machine.
2 Nozzles This returns nozzles on the head to the nozzle station.
Nozzles can be exchanged by removing the nozzle
station from the machine.
3 Head This moves the head to the removal position and then
cuts power to the head.
4 Backup plate (maximizing the This maximizes the width of the conveyors.
conveyor width)

Press the icon for the command that you wish to perform. If the exchange command is used at the side that
operation is enabled, it is possible to also perform exchange at the opposite side. Switch between sides to
enable operation when necessary and then perform the work.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 203

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.7.1 Exchanging parts supply units

1. Press [Device unit].

30SYS-1041

2. Guidance displays for removing the parts supply unit. Press the perform command button.

30SYS-1042

3. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

30SYS-0955

Note
After this, guidance displays at the operation panel to set a parts supply unit.

30SYS-1043

204 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

4. Set the parts supply unit in the machine.

30SYS-0957

5. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine will draw the parts supply unit in and clamp it.

30SYS-1044

Note
The red frames in the pictogram indicate that the parts supply unit is not pushed in enough. When the red frames in three locations switch off,
the machine clamps the parts supply unit automatically and there is no need to use buttons on the operation panel.

6. When attached back in the machine, the manual mode menu is redisplayed.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 205

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.7.2 Exchanging nozzles

CAUTION 66
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to body parts if the door is not
completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come back down and
injure any body parts in the way.

1. Press [Nozzles].

30SYS-1045

2. The main screen for exchanging nozzles is displayed. Push START.

30SYS-1046

• Nozzles on the head are returned to the nozzle station.

3. Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

30SYS-1047

206 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

4. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

5. Open the front door.

6. Remove the nozzle station and exchange nozzles or replace the nozzle station.

7. When the work is complete, press the perform command button.

30SYS-1049

Note
Return to the unit exchange menu screen if other units have to be exchanged. Press the button of the [Exchange] command on the top of the
screen.

8. Close the front door.

9. Set the parts supply unit in the machine.

10. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine will draw the parts supply unit in and clamp it.

30SYS-1050

Note
The red frames in the pictogram indicate that the parts supply unit is not pushed in enough. When the red frames in three locations switch off,
the machine clamps the parts supply unit automatically and there is no need to use buttons on the operation panel.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 207

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.7.3 Exchanging heads

CAUTION 66
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to body parts if the door is not
completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come back down and
injure any body parts in the way.

1. Press [Head].

30SYS-1051

2. The main screen for exchanging heads is displayed. Push START.

30SYS-1052

Note
This moves the head to the exchange position.

3. Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

30SYS-1053

208 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

4. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

5. Open the front door.

6. Exchange the head. Refer to "4. Basic operation" in the mechanical reference manual for details on
how to replace the head.

7. When the work is complete, press the perform command button.

30SYS-1055

Note
Return to the unit exchange menu screen if other units have to be exchanged. Press the button of the [Exchange] command on the top of the
screen.

8. Close the front door.

9. Set the parts supply unit in the machine.

10. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine will draw the parts supply unit in and clamp it.

30SYS-1056

Note
The red frames in the pictogram indicate that the parts supply unit is not pushed in enough. When the red frames in three locations switch off,
the machine clamps the parts supply unit automatically and there is no need to use buttons on the operation panel.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 209

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.7.4 Maximizing the conveyor width

CAUTION 66
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to body parts if the door is not
completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come back down and
injure any body parts in the way.

When this command is used, the conveyor moves to its maximum width. This means the following work can
be performed.

• Removing backup pins set on the backup plate

• Cleaning the backup plate surface

• Performing maintenance on the conveyor

1. Press [Backup plates].

30SYS-1057

2. The main screen for the changing conveyor width is displayed. Push START.

30SYS-1058

Note
This action makes the conveyor move to its maximum width.

210 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

3. Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

30SYS-1059

4. Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

5. Open the front door.

6. Remove the backup pins and then perform the intended work such as cleaning the backup plate.

7. When the work is complete, press the perform command button.

30SYS-1061

Note
Return to the unit exchange menu screen if other units have to be exchanged. Press the button of the [Exchange] command on the top of the
screen.

8. Close the front door.

9. Set the parts supply unit in the machine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 211

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

10. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine will draw the parts supply unit in and clamp it.

30SYS-1062

Note
The red frames in the pictogram indicate that the parts supply unit is not pushed in enough. When the red frames in three locations switch off,
the machine clamps the parts supply unit automatically and there is not need to use buttons on the operation panel.

212 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

6.8 Head adjustment command

The feeder type brush unit is used when cleaning nozzles.

Note
The applicable heads are H24(G, S) and DX (R12) heads. This is for standard nozzles.

1. Press [Adjust].

30SYS-1063

2. The following command selection screen displays.

1 2 3 30SYS-1064

No. Command name Function

1 Clean head nozzles Use this command to clean all of the nozzles currently
on the head and the thermal compensation marks on
the head.
2 Clean all nozzles Use this command to clean all of the nozzles on the
head and in the nozzle station as well as the thermal
compensation marks on the head.
3 Remove jig parts Use this command to remove the hybrid calibration chip
jig part from the storage unit for jig parts.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 213

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.8.1 Cleaning head nozzles

1. Press [Clean head nozzles].

30SYS-1068

2. The main screen for cleaning nozzles is displayed. Set the feeder type brush unit at a slot and then
push START.

30SYS-1066

Note
The pictogram displays while the machine is operating. When nozzle cleaning is finished, the screen returns to the [Adjust] command menu.

30SYS-1067

Refer to the Feeder Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual for details on how to use the unit.

214 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

6.8.2 Cleaning all of the nozzles

1. Press [Clean all nozzles].

30SYS-1065

2. The main screen for cleaning nozzles is displayed. Set the feeder type brush unit at a slot and then
push START.

30SYS-1069

Note
The pictogram displays while the machine is operating. When nozzle cleaning is finished, the screen returns to the [Adjust] command menu.

30SYS-1067

Refer to the Feeder Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual for details on how to use the unit.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 215

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.8.3 Removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part

CAUTION 66
• Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur to body parts if the door is not
completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come back down and
injure any body parts in the way.

CAUTION 65
• Be careful to not lose the jig parts such as by dropping them in the module. Turning off the machine
main switch while the jig parts are placed at the placing area causes loss of the jig parts.

This command is used when removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part from the storage unit for jig parts.
Clean the removed hybrid calibration chip jig part before performing hybrid calibration.

30SYS-1070-a

Removing glass jig parts is not supported.

1. Press [Remove jig parts].

30SYS-1071

216 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

2. The main screen for removing the jig part is displayed. Push START.

30SYS-1073

Note
The pictogram displays while the machine is operating. The chip jig part is moved to the placing area from the storage unit of the jig stand.

30SYS-1031

3. The steps which follow are different based on the machine specifications.

a. When using a clamp type parts supply unit, the button to remove the parts supply unit is displayed.

30SYS-1074

1) Press the button to remove the parts supply unit.

2) Gently remove the parts supply unit from the machine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 217

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

b. For the fixed type parts supply unit specifications, guidance to open the front door is displayed.

30SYS-1072

Note
Remove the set feeders and take out the waste tape box so as not have them in the way of personnel performing the work.

4. Open the front door.

Caution
Read CAUTION 66.

5. Remove the chip jig part.

01SYS-0952

Note
When removing jig parts, use soft plastic tweezers or a similar tool in order not to scratch the jig parts and the storage unit.

Caution
Read CAUTION 65.

6. Clean the chip jig part. Check the surface and if there is any dirt, use a cotton swab to remove it.

Note
Do not use any water or solvents.

218 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

7. Set the jig parts in the hybrid calibration stand.

01SYS-0953

8. Press the perform command button.

30SYS-1076

9. Close the front door.

10. Perform the following steps when removing a parts supply unit.

a. Set the parts supply unit in the machine.

b. Press the perform command button when the following pictogram displays on the operation panel.
The machine will draw the parts supply unit in and clamp it.

30SYS-1077

Perform the work in the same manner for the other side.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 219

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

6.9 Information command

This command displays information for the module, base, and each unit set in the module.

1. Press [Information].

30SYS-1078

2. The information display screen is displayed.

30SYS-1079

3. Select the desired unit to display the information for that unit.

30SYS-1080

a. Press the production button to return to the main screen for production.

b. Press the manual command button to return to the manual mode menu.

220 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 6. Using manual commands

Unit Information displayed

Module Type Serial number
Application version number Recovery count
Base Type IP address of the base
Conveyors Conveyor type Serial number
Software version Motor bank version
Panel transport interface board version
Tray units Type Software version
Option information RFID version
Feeder pallet Type Software version
Feeder pallet levelness measurement data (Calibration [um])
Tray unit-M ID number Software version
Feeder Slot number set
ID number Software version
Part camera and mark camera Camera type Serial number
Software version
Head Type Serial number
Software version Head option
Nozzle station Type Serial number
Auto-tool station Type Serial number
Nozzles Socket number 2D code number
Auto-tool Type 2D code number

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 221

6. Using manual commands SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

222 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7. Accessory Software
Accessory Software brings together various tools used for things such as production preparation and for
non-production related commands. This chapter contains a summary of the main functions in Accessory
Software.

7.1 Possible operations

Accessory Software is designed to get data from the machine such as images and trace data, make special
settings, and perform special commands as well as being used to help monitor the progress of the machine.

• Checking the machine operation status and searching for errors

• Specifying machine configuration settings

• Specifying module configuration settings

• Acquire machine information such as trace data and images

• Managing calibration values such as feeder pallet levelness measurements

• Remote commands such as software updates and forcibly clearing errors

For further details on how to use Accessory Software, refer to the online Fuji Accessory Software Operation.

Click here to display the Accessory

Software Operation Manual.

30SYS-0865-E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 223

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.2 Starting Accessory Software

If Accessory Software is installed in a network environment, Accessory Software can be accessed by any
computer with Internet Explorer in the same network.

1. Double-click the [Internet Explorer] icon on the desktop.

2. Enter the address (URL) "http://<FUJI accessory software server name>/fujiweb/" and then press
[Enter]. After loading is completed, the main page (Floor Monitor) is displayed. (Refer to "7.3 Floor
Monitor".)

224 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7.3 Floor Monitor

Floor Monitor displays the status for all lines and machines in the factory.

7.3.1 Displayed items and their meanings

The data at this screen is updated every 15 seconds.

12 7

1 2 9 10 11
3
4
5
6

30SYS-1100-Ea

No. Name Explanation

1 Line name This displays the line name.
2 Link icons Click the icon for the item you wish to display.
Displays the pages for specifying machine settings.

Displays the pages for vision processing error analysis.

Displays the pages for viewing the placing time history.

Displays the pages for production plan progress monitor.

Displays errors that occurred when using the automatic

changeover function.
Displays the pages for maintenance warnings.
Displays the pages for trace data that is automatically
acquired when errors occur.
Displays the pages for the nozzle list. When the background
for a nozzle is yello that indicates that the nozzle needs
maintenance. 30SYS-0322aE

3 Equipment name This displays the machine name and module number. Click
the machine name or module number to open the page for
specifying machine settings.

M1 M2-1

M2-2

M1 M2 30SYS-0754

4 Module status This displays the status for the selected module. If an error has
occurred at the module, the cause also displays. Click the
error cause to open the Error Details page.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 225

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

No. Name Explanation

5 Job name This displays the current job name. Click the job name to open
the Trend page.
6 Line configuration This displays the line module configuration. Click a module to
check the current status of that module.
7 Service list This displays the service list. Click here if the line configuration
displayed in the Floor Monitor does not match the actual line
configuration.
8 Update button This updates the information displayed in the Floor Monitor to
the latest.
9 Utilization Displays the operation rate for the last 10 minutes.
10 Comp panels Displays the quantity of panels produced for the last 4 hours.
11 Success rate Displays the success rates for the last 10 minutes.
12 Setting Information can be displayed based on production by
customizing the display for Floor Monitor.

Refer to the Fuji Accessory Software Operation Manual (online manual) for details on Floor Monitor and
other items.

Setting window

01SYS-1079

226 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

Item Description
Option Items displayed in Option1, Option2, Option3, Option4, and
Option5.
None No display
Line Utilization Operating status (last 10 minutes)
Completed Panel Production quantity
Completed Panel Production quantity (displayed in different colors for each lane)
(Lane Color)
Success Rate Success rate (last 10 minutes)
CPH Cph (last 1 hour)
LOB LOB (last 5 panels)
Job Information Job image (only for Fuji Flexa)
Lane Order Order of the lanes displayed in Floor Monitor
Ascending Ascending
Descending Descending
Status Color Settings for the colors when [Line Utilization] is selected in
[Option] (The same color is used for production information.)
Original Original color of Floor Monitor.
FloorInsight Color used for Floor Insight.
Completed Panel Display period when [Completed Panel] is selected in [Option]
(displaying for a long time heightens the load).
Last Displays the last specified time.
Fix Displays the quantity for the specified period of time from the
specified time.
Shift Displays the quantity for the period of the shift based on two
shifts or three shifts.
Success Rate Settings for the colors when [Success Rate] is selected in
[Option] (The same color is used for production information.)
Warning Displays in this warning color when the rate drops to be at or
below the specified value.
Error Displays in this error color when the rate drops to be at or
below the specified value.
LOB Settings for the colors when [LOB] is selected in [Option]
Warning Displays in this warning color when the rate drops to be at or
below the specified value.
Error Displays in this error color when the rate drops to be at or
below the specified value.
Decimal Places Number of decimal places for each rate displayed in the
production information screen.
Clock Settings whether to display the clock in Floor Monitor

Note
LOB (%) = The average cycle time for all modules divided by the bottle neck cycle time.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 227

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.4 Vision processing error analysis

When a vision processing error occurs during production, the related image is acquired from the machine
and displayed. Furthermore, by using VPDplus, shape data can also be edited. It is possible to check errors
for IPS images in IPSViewer.

7.4.1 Displayed items and their meanings

Click the vision processing link icon in the Floor Monitor to open the vision processing error analysis page.

30SYS-0323E

Below is an explanation of the displayed items.

No. Item Description

1 Module Displays the module (robot) to perform vision processing error
analysis.

M1 M2-1

M2-2

M1 M2 30SYS-0754

2 Sort by Displays the images in data order or slot order.

3 Image Displays the image acquired when the vision processing error
occurred.
4 IPS image Displays the IPS image at the time of a vision processing error.
5 Download Click to save the part image and edit data. Use VPDplus to edit
data.
6 Download Click to save the IPS image. Check the saved IPS image in
IPSViewer.
7 Date created Displays the date and time the vision processing error
occurred.

228 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

No. Item Description

8 Slot Displays the slot the parts from which the vision processing
error occurred came.
9 Part number Displays the part number used by the part for which the error
occurred.
10 Shape name Displays the shape name used by the part for which the error
occurred.
11 Error code This displays the error code of the error that occurred during
vision processing. Click the error code to display the error
details.
12 Holder Displays the holder name on which the IPS vision processing
error occurred.
13 IPS Error This displays the error code of the error that occurred during
IPS vision processing. Click the error code to display the error
details.
14 Exit monitoring Exits vision processing error monitoring. The images acquired
will not be deleted.
15 Redo monitoring Redoes vision processing error monitoring. This deletes all
images acquired, and starts without any error status.
16 Vision processing settings Specify whether to start vision processing error monitoring.
Click to display the vision processing error analysis setting
screen.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 229

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring settings

30SYS-0324E

No. Item Description

1 Module Selects the applicable module number.
2 Always save the error image Select this check box to always save the newest image for
vision processing errors. When this check box is not selected,
monitoring is automatically stopped after acquiring the vision
process image.
3 Monitor check Select this check box when you want to monitor vision
processing errors for the slot.
4 Slot Displays the slot for which vision processing errors will be
monitored.
5 Part number Displays the part number of the part in the slot.
6 Shape name Displays the shape data name of the part in the slot.
7 Save pickup error Select this check box when images are to be acquired for
pickup errors.
8 Error code When vision processing errors for the specified error codes
occur, the image for that vision processing error is saved.
9 Back Deletes settings and returns to the vision processing error
analysis screen.
10 Clear Clears the specified settings. To update the settings at the
machine, click [Apply].
11 Set all Specifies the same settings for all slots. This changes all of the
slots on the module to be the same setting.
12 Apply Updates the specified settings to the machine.

230 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7.5 Warnings
If the success rate of the product being assembled drops, a warning is sent to the machines, which can be
viewed by operators. If the productivity then goes back above the specified success rate, the warning
condition is removed.

This allows users to act on drops in productivity in realtime.

7.5.1 Displaying warnings

Click [Warnings] from the menu to display the warnings.

7.5.2 Displayed items and their meanings

The warning information is updated every 120 seconds to display the current status. The selection box for
the production line displays at the top of the page. Select the name of the production line of which to monitor
the warning status. The default is [All]. To display warnings for a single line only, select that line name from
the drop-down list.

30SYS-0336E

No. Item Description

1 Line name This displays the name of the line for which warnings are
currently displayed.
2 Machine name This displays the name of the machine for which warnings are
currently displayed.
3 Slot This displays the name of the slot for which warnings are
currently displayed.
4 First warning This indicates the time the warning status first occurred. The
warning has continued as is from this time.
5 Latest time This indicates the most recent time for the warning status.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 231

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

No. Item Description

6 Success rate Displays the success rate when warnings occur.
7 Error count by code Warnings display separately in order of highest incidence. The
error code, error description, and count display. This allows
users to efficiently prioritize countermeasure actions.
8 Error graph This displays a graph showing the transition of errors over
time. Determine time periods of high errors using this graph.
For example, a strong upward trend (to the right) indicates a
high priority to take action, or continuing errors indicates the
negligence of a problem.

7.5.3 Displaying current warnings

Click [List] in the header menu to display the current warnings in the order of occurrence.

The warnings monitor screen is updated automatically when a warning occurs. From this display, it is
possible to see at which production lines or modules the warnings are occurring.

NXTAS0028E

The items displayed and their descriptions are as follows.

No. Description
1 Select a check box to select that item.
2 Displays a list of the currently active warnings. This section displays the line name, equipment
name, slot, current success rate, and the latest error.
3 Click to display the warning information details view.
4 Click to select all of the check boxes.
5 Click to clear the check boxes for the selected items.

232 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7.5.4 Displaying warning details

Click the details icon in the warnings list screen to show further information about the warnings. Plan
countermeasures for the errors and prioritize these countermeasures based on the problems with the
highest frequency which can be determined by the error code counts.

7.5.5 Displaying the warnings log list

Click [Log] in the header to display the warning log which displays previous warnings.

30SYS-0337E

No. Description
1 Indicates the date of the warning.
2 Indicates the name of the line at which the warning occurred.
3 Indicates the name of the equipment and module number at which the warning occurred.
4 Indicates the nature of the warning and the slot at which the warning occurred.
5 Indicates the current page number being displayed from the log. To view other pages, click the
relevant page number.
6 Clears the warning log.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 233

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.5.6 Setting the success rate

Click [Success Rate] in the header to display the success rate screen. Set the success rate for each
production line, or for all the lines.

NXTAS0030Ea

The items displayed and their descriptions are as follows.

No. Description
1 Specify the items for which the success rate settings are to be made. If "All lines" is selected
and [Apply] is clicked, then the success rate settings will be for all lines.
2 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate warnings are issued. The
current setting is displayed when the screen is displayed.
3 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate errors are issued. The current
setting is displayed when the screen is displayed.
4 Click this to return the warning and error settings back to the default settings. Click [Apply] after
clicking this to enable the default settings.
5 This applies the specified success rates for the warnings and errors. If this button is not clicked,
the entered data not applied.

234 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7.6 Messages
This function allows users to distribute information between shifts and Accessory Software users within the
network.

The five most recent messages display in the lower section of the menu.

30SYS-0338E

7.6.1 Displaying messages

Click the icon for a message in the menu to display that message. Click [To List] to display the entire list of
messages and to access the message editing function.

1
30SYS-0339E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 235

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.6.2 Adding messages

To add a message, click [Add] from the message list. Enter the desired message and specify the necessary
settings and then click [Apply] to save the message.

30SYS-0341E

7.6.3 Editing messages

To edit a message, click the icon for that message and the message is displayed. To edit the message, click
[Edit]. To delete the selected message, click [Delete]. To close the screen without making any changes,
click [Cancel].

30SYS-0340E

236 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7.7 Error Search

Click [Error Search] in the menu to open the error search screen.

30SYS-0343E

Enter the error code to search for in the search text box and click [Search]. A list of the items that match the
entered text is displayed.

30SYS-0342E

Click the link of the item from the list to display the details for that item. If [Edit] is clicked from the details
page, it is possible to edit the selected message.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 237

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.8 Service list

This screen displays the current working status and version of the realtime workingrate buffer services
installed on the computers with the Fuji Flexa machine communication service to which the machines are
connected. In addition, the computers with this service are listed.

From this screen, it is also possible to started the installation of the realtime workingrate buffer service on
the current computer.

7.8.1 Displaying the services

1. Click [Service List] from the header in Floor Monitor.

2. The following screen displays.

NXTAS0039Ea

The items displayed and their descriptions are as follows.

No. Item Description

1 [Check] for RWB services Click this to display a list of the RWB services and their status.
2 [Check] for network Click this to display a list of the network connections and their
connection status.
3 [Check] for individual network Use this to check the connection with a specific computer.
connections Enter the host name or IP address to be checked and then
click [Check].. The communication status of the specified item
is displayed.

238 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7.8.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer service

installer

1. Click [Download] in the lower section of Floor Monitor.

2. Click [Fuji Realtime Workingrate Buffer Service] to begin the download process.

01SYS-0378E

3. Click [Save] in the dialog box that displays.

4. Specify the location to save the downloaded file and click [Save]. The file is downloaded to the
specified location.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 239

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.9 Acquiring machine trace data automatically

Settings can be specified in Accessory Software to automatically acquire trace data when errors occur.

7.9.1 Displaying the auto trace data page

Click the [Auto Trace Data] icon (shown below) in Floor Monitor.

30SYS-0756E

7.9.2 Displayed items and their meanings

Error codes for errors that occurred display in the [Auto Trace Data] page along with the date and time at
which they occurred and the module number.

2 3 4 5

6 30SYS-0423E

No. Item Description

1 Auto Trace Settings Click to display the page for specifying auto trace settings.
2 Date hr Displays the time that the trace data was acquired from the
machine.
3 Module Displays the module number from which the trace data was
acquired.

240 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

No. Item Description

4 Error code Displays the error codes included in the trace data that was
acquired from the machine. Click an error code to display the
error details for that code.
5 Save trace Click to open and save the trace data file.
6 Clear Click this to delete acquired trace data.

7.9.3 Specifying automatic trace data acquisition

Click [Auto Trace Settings] in the top right of the [Auto Trace Data] page. The [Auto Trace Settings] page is
displayed.

30SYS-0424E

Refer to "7.2 Specifying automatic trace data settings" in chapter 2 of the Accessory Software Operation
Manual for details on settings.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 241

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

7.9.4 Machine operation panel during automatic trace

acquisition
After specifying automatic trace acquisition settings, if a specified error occurs during operation, the
machine acquires the trace data and then stops due to the error.

30SYS-1085

242 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 7. Accessory Software

7.9.5 Downloading trace data

1. Click the [Auto Trace Data] icon (shown below) in Floor Monitor.

30SYS-0756E

Note
The red section in the icon blinks if there is trace data.

2. The acquired trace data can be downloaded by clicking the icon in the right column.

Caution
Trace data displayed here is deleted automatically after 1 week.

Save trace 30SYS-0426E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 243

7. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

244 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8. Settings and management

Operation settings can be specified for machines and individual modules to suit the production conditions.
Accessory Software is used to specify settings. This section also explains how to specify settings, manage
calibration data, and perform remote operation.

• Machine configuration settings

• Module configuration settings

• Data acquisition

• Calibration management

• Remote operation

8.1 Starting machine accessories

1. From Floor Monitor, click the machine or module number for which Machine Accessories is to be used.
The Machine Accessories log on page is displayed.

2. Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.

30SYS-0344E

3. Enter the user password and then click [Log on]. The main menu is displayed.

30SYS-0345E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 245

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.2 Machine configuration settings

These settings affect all the AIMEX machines that make up a machine on the line.

1. Click [Machine Configuration] to display the [Machine Configuration] screen.

30SYS-1150-E

2. When an item is selected at the [Category] selection box, the settings shown under the list
automatically change to match the selected category.

Category Setting
Operation settings Changeover guidance settings
Recovery settings
Alternate feeder (Alternate tray) change condition settings
Nozzle cleaning settings
IPS dust detection settings
Pickup error prevention settings
Disable feeder buttons during production to prevent collisions with
nozzles setting
Allow 0402 (01005") parts to use different package data
Feeder supply check settings
Specify feeder indexing based on job
LCR check setting
Mark reading settings Fiducial mark settings
Solder mark read settings
Panel conveyance settings Conveyor width settings
Panel clamp settings
Panel conveyance operation settings
Tray unit settings Tray pickup start point and movement direction settings
Tray unit-LT/LTW settings

246 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

Category Setting
Host coordination settings Fujitrax settings
Automatic changeover settings
Skip boards at the machine setting
HexaFeeder cassette ID recognition
Error code used when reporting an empty pickup in production
information
Starting method when using remote start
Signal tower settings Machine status
Calibration settings Shorten auto calibration when replacing heads
Operation when placing height Operation when placing height measurement sensor has
measurement sensor has recognition errors
recognition errors
Priority operation settings Supply guidance priority settings
Device exchange command operation setting
Display language Language setting
Multiple machine settings Link with the machine from the previous stage.
Link with the machine from the next stage.

3. Specify the necessary settings using the options available. For details on the settings, refer to the
explanation list below the settings.

4. After all required settings have been specified, click [Send to Machine].

5. Once all changed settings have been sent to the machine, click [Close].

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 247

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.2.1 Specifying nozzle cleaning settings

This function cleans nozzles set on the head periodically during production. It also cleans the thermal
compensation marks on the head at the same time.

Note
The applicable heads are H24(G, S) and DX (R12) heads. This is for standard nozzles.

30SYS-0230E

• [Nozzle cleaning during production guidance function]: [Used]

• [Nozzle cleaning interval]: Specify a time from 1 to 240 hours. Nozzle cleaning guidance displays
when the specified amount of production time has elapsed.

• [Not cleaned nozzle stoppage interval]: Specify a time from 0 to 60 minutes. This stops production
if nozzles are not cleaned within the specified time. Production is not stopped if "0" is specified.

This function can be used with modules which have a feeder type brush unit.

8.2.2 Specifying IPS dust detection settings

This function detects dust on supported heads during production.

30SYS-0398E

• [Operation when dust is detected]: [Error stop]

This function can be used with machines which have H24(G, S) heads.

248 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.2.3 Tray pickup start point and movement direction settings

The pickup order for tray parts may be different on Fuji machines compared to machines made by other
companies.

The first pickup position and the movement direction for tray parts can now be specified in Accessory
Software. This means that even partially used trays from machines made by other companies can be used
on the AIMEX-2S.

Set direction

01SYS-0477E

1. Specify the starting pickup position and movement direction for pickup from tray units.

30SYS-0417E

• [Tray pickup start point]: Select one of the starting positions

• The starting pickup position from this setting is based on tray direction 0.

Direction: 0 degrees Direction: 90 degrees

3 2 2 1

1 Bottom right
2 Top right
3 Top left 3 4
4 1
4 Bottom left
01SYS-0479aE

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 249

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2. Specify the movement direction for pickup from tray units.

30SYS-0418E

• [Tray pickup movement direction]: Select either [Move in Y-direction] or [Move in X-direction]

• The pickup direction from this setting is based on tray direction 0.

Direction: 0 degrees Direction: 90 degrees

1 2

1 Y-direction
2
2 X-direction 01SYS-0481E

Pickup order operation table

The following types of operation are possible by specifying the pickup order settings.

a. Settings: [Lower right] and [Y-direction] (default values)

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0482E

b. Settings: [Lower right] and [X-direction]

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0483E

250 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

c. Settings: [Upper right] and [Y-direction]

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0484E

d. Settings: [Upper right] and [X-direction]

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0485E

e. Settings: [Upper left] and [Y-direction]

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0486E

f. Settings: [Upper left] and [X-direction]

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0487E

g. Settings: [Lower left] and [Y-direction]

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0488E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 251

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

h. Settings: [Lower left] and [X-direction]

Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees

01SYS-0489E

Important points after setting the tray unit pickup order

Do not change the [Tray pickup start point] or [Tray pickup movement direction] settings after supplying
parts to tray units. This may cause the following errors.

a. Parts out guidance may display when there are still parts in a tray.

b. The machine may attempt pickup from an empty cavity.

252 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.2.4 Reference position settings for tray pickup start point

When the tray reference coordinate position is different from those used for machines from other
companies, it is possible to change the reference coordinate position to match the machines from other
companies.

01SYS-1081E

• Fixed: The reference coordinate position (X= 1, Y= 1) is fixed to always be the lower right corner of
the tray.

• Adjustable: The reference coordinate position changes as shown below according to the [Tray
pickup start point] setting.

a. When "Adjustable" is set for [Reference position for tray pickup start point] and "Start from top right"
is set for [Tray pickup start point].

Direction: 0 Direction: 90

01SYS-0482J

01SYS-1082

b. When "Adjustable" is set for [Reference position for tray pickup start point] and "Start from top left" is
set for [Tray pickup start point].

Direction: 0 Direction: 90

(6, 1) (6, 10)

(1, 1) (1, 10)

01SYS-1083

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 253

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.2.5 Specifying automatic changeover settings (barcode ID

mode)
The barcode attached to the panel is read and the machine performs job changeover to the job matching
the barcode ID before beginning production.

Note
For how to make settings and use this function, refer to the "AIMEX Automatic Changeover Instruction Manual".

Note
The machine stops producing when the ID mark contains prohibited characters. When this occurs, remove the panel and check the ID mark.

30SYS-0384E

• [Fujitrax Verifier]: [Used]

• [Fujitrax Profiler]: [Use]

• [Automatic changeover]: [Used]

• [Automatic changeover mode]: [Barcode ID]

The following procedure is required to enable the settings.

254 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

1. Insert the license dongle at the computer that has Accessory Software installed.

2. At the Floor Monitor page, specify the following. For more details regarding the operation method,
refer to "Chapter 4 Automatic Changeover Function" in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.

a. Specify the Fuji Central Server host name for each machine.

Note
Refer to "Chapter 4, 5.1 Setting up Fuji Central Server " in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.

b. Create a panel type list.

• Click the pictogram shown below to display the [Monitor] screen.

30SYS-0385E

• Click [Panel ID] at the top of the screen.

30SYS-0396E

• Create a panel type list.

Note
Refer to "5.5 Editing the panel type list" in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.

3. Log on to Fujitrax Web and click [Profiling Settings] from the [System Settings]. Select the [Do not
permit conveyance] option for the [Panel conveyance when ID scanning error occurs] setting.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 255

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.2.6 Specifying automatic changeover settings (handy

scanner mode)

30SYS-0386E

• Automatic changeover: Used

• Automatic changeover mode: Handy scanner

The following procedure is required to enable the settings.

1. Insert the license dongle at the computer that has Accessory Software installed.

2. At the Floor Monitor page, specify the following. For more details regarding the operation method,
refer to "4. Automatic Changeover Function" in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.

3. Register the lines on which automatic changeover with a handy scanner is to be used.

Note
Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual "4.5.2 Registering lines that use the function for automatic changeover using a Handy
Scanner".

4. Create a table for the relation between the factory setup (lines and machines) and the machine type
IDs.

Note
Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual "3.5.3 Creating a relationship table for the machine type ID and equipment".

5. Create a table for the relationship between the jobs and the part type IDs.

Note
Refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual "4.5.4 Creating a relationship table for the production job and the production part ID".

256 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.2.7 Specifying panel position correction function settings

This function is used to correct the stopping position of panels loaded onto the conveyor. This function is
particularly effective when using panels for which the stopping position may be unstable due to the weight
or shape of the panel.

There are two methods for correcting the panel stopping position. Select one or these.

a. Fiducial mark correction

• Fiducial marks on the panel that arrived at the conveyor are vision processed and the panel
stopping position is corrected.

b. Correcting using the panel edge

• The edge of the panel that arrived at the conveyor is vision processed and the panel stopping
position is corrected. To prevent reflections from the backup plate, a felt paper plate must be set.

Felt paper plate Type A Type B

Drg. No.:AA8AMxx Drg. No.:AA8ANxx 30SYS-0368E

Note
When correcting using the panel edge, set panel edge sequences in the job. Refer to the AIMEX Series Programming manual for details.

1. Specify panel transport settings.

30SYS-0204aE

• [Panel stopping position correction target]: Select either [Machine], [Module], or [Each job].

• [Panel stopping position correction]: Select either [Correct based on fiducial mark] or [Correct based
on panel edge]

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 257

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

2. If [Module] was selected for [Panel stopping position correction target], select [Send to Machine], and
then perform panel conveyance settings for the applicable module at [Module Configuration].

30SYS-0205E

• [Panel stopping position correction]: Select either [Correct based on fiducial mark] or [Correct based
on panel edge]

3. If [Each job] was selected for [Panel stopping position correction target], it is necessary to specify the
following items in the machine configuration. Refer to the AIMEX Series Programming manual for
details.

30SYS-0399

For extended conveyors

To compensate the panel stopping position for extended conveyors, specify the offsets in the module
configuration in Accessory Software.

30SYS-1130-E

258 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

• Lane 1 panel loading offset: The offset value for the panel stopping position when loading a panel
for lane 1

• Lane 1 panel checking offset: The offset value for the panel stopping position when checking a
panel for lane 1

• Lane 1 panel shifting offset: The offset value for the panel stopping position when shifting a panel
for lane 1

Note
1. When facing the machine, (+) is to the right and (-) to the left
2. If this setting is changed, the new setting is applied the next time a panel is conveyed.

8.2.8 Specifying resupply settings for the tray unit-LTW

This section explains how to specify either magazine A or magazine B as the resupply magazine. Specify
one magazine for production (original tray) and one for resupply (alternate tray). Operators always supply
parts to the magazine for resupply.

1. Specify Fujitrax settings.

30SYS-0207E

• [Fujitrax Verifier]: [Not used]

• [Tray unit-LT/LTW Verifier]: [Not used]

• Ensure that one of the above settings is set to [Not used].

2. Specify tray unit-LT/LTW resupply operation settings.

30SYS-0206aE

• [Tray unit-LT/LTW resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A] or [Part resupply from magazine B]

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 259

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3. Specify the alternate tray change conditions.

30SYS-0208E

• [Alternate tray change condition]: [Parts out]

The following settings are required in the job to enable the settings.

a. In the [Feeder Setup] tab of the machine configuration, change the [Status] of the following slots in
the supply magazine of the tray unit to [Reserved].

• Tray unit-LTW: 10-1 to 12-2

b. Set the original trays in the production magazine (the one to be picked up from).

c. Optimize and then set the alternate trays in the supply magazine.

Note
Refer to the AIMEX Series Programming manual for details.

260 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.2.9 Dynamic alternate tray supply settings

Dynamic alternate tray supply is one of the operation modes for a tray unit-LT/LTW. One magazine is
specified as the production magazine and the other is specified as the supply magazine. In this mode,
operators set tray parts during production at any of the empty slots specified for alternate tray use.

In order to use this mode, it is necessary to have a tray unit-LT/LTW that supports the dynamic alternate
tray supply function (see below for requirements).

• Tray unit with barcode reader

• Tray drawers with RFID tags

Dynamic alternate tray operation order

There are three operating modes that can be used for dynamic alternate tray supply. The mode depends
on the [Machine Configuration] settings in Accessory Software and feeder setup specified in the job.

a. Mode A

Tray positions (job feeder setup) Alternate trays are set in the same tray drawer as the original tray.
in the production magazine
Dynamic alternate tray supply -
settings (machine configuration
settings)
Operation 1. Parts are picked up from the original tray.
2. When parts run out, the empty tray is exchanged for an alternate
tray from the supply magazine.
3. Parts are picked up from the new tray.

b. Mode B

Tray positions (job feeder setup) Alternate trays are set on a different tray drawer to the original tray.
in the production magazine
Dynamic alternate tray supply Priority given to production magazines
settings (machine configuration
settings)
Operation 1. Parts are picked up from the original tray.
2. When parts run out, the empty tray is exchanged for an alternate
tray from the supply magazine.
3. Parts are picked up from the alternate tray in the production
magazine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 261

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

c. Mode C

Tray positions (job feeder setup) Alternate trays are set on a different tray drawer to the original tray.
in the production magazine
Dynamic alternate tray supply Priority given to supply magazines
settings (machine configuration
settings)
Operation 1. Parts are picked up from the original tray.
2. When parts run out, the empty tray is exchanged for an alternate
tray from the supply magazine.
3. Parts are picked up from the new tray.
*Alternate trays in the production magazine are used once all the
alternate trays in the supply magazine have been used.

1. Specify Fujitrax settings.

30SYS-0844E

• [Fujitrax Verifier]: [Used]

• [Tray unit-LT/LTW Verifier]: [Part type check + position check]

262 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

2. Specify the alternate tray change conditions.

01SYS-0895E

• [Alternate tray change condition]: [Parts out]

3. Specify settings for the tray unit.

30SYS-0846E

• [Tray unit-LT/LTW resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A] or [Part resupply from magazine B]

• [Tray supply order]: [Slot number order]

• [Dynamic alternate tray supply device transition order]: [Priority given to production magazines] or
[Priority given to supply magazines]

For mode A, either option can be specified.

When you are specifying the supply order and you want to prioritize the use of old parts, select the [Part
registration time order] option.

The following settings are required in the job to enable the settings.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 263

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

a. Specify settings so that all the original trays are in the production magazine.

• For mode A: Specify alternate trays in the same drawer as the original tray.

• For modes B and C: Specify alternate trays in different drawers to the original tray.

b. In the [Feeder Setup] tab of the machine configuration, change the [Status] of all slots in the
production magazine of the tray unit to [Fixed].

c. In the [Feeder Setup] tab of the machine configuration, change the [Status] of all slots in the supply
magazine of the tray unit to [Reserved].

d. Optimize the job.

Note
Refer to the AIMEX Series Programming manual for details.

264 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.2.10 Specifying multi production settings

Multi production is a mode in which production is performed independently in a twin robot module, with one
robot picking and placing parts at side 1 and the other robot picking and placing parts at side 2.

In the following situations, lead time can be shortened by performing multi production.

a. When AIMEX Multi Job Line Balancer cannot be used due to sudden changes in the production plan.

b. When changeovers make up a large part of a day's production time.

c. When there are many changeovers to be performed by the operator that cannot be performed
automatically.

Side 2 Side 2 Side 2

Job B B Job B B B

Job A A Job C C

Side 1 Side 1 Side 1

30SYS-0428E

1. Specify the settings for automatic changeover (using the handy scanner).

Note
Refer to "8.2.10 Specifying multi production settings" for details.

2. Specify conveyor width settings.

30SYS-0429E

• [Lane Pitch Setting]: [Both lanes towards their feeder pallet] (recommended)

• [Pitch when using both lanes towards their feeder pallet]: [Maximum pitch]

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 265

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

㻮㼛㼠㼔㻌㼘㼍㼚㼑㼟㻌㼠㼛㼣㼍㼞㼐㻌
㼠㼔㼑㼕㼞㻌㼒㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞㻌㼜㼍㼘㼘㼑㼠

Lane 2

㻹㼍㼤㼕㼙㼡㼙㻌㼜㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼢㼍㼘㼡㼑㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌
㼙㼛㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼎㼛㼠㼔㻌㼘㼍㼚㼑㼟㻌㼠㼛㼣㼍㼞㼐㼟㻌
㼠㼔㼑㼕㼞㻌㼒㼑㼑㼐㼑㼞㻌㼜㼍㼘㼘㼑㼠㻌㻔㼙㼙㻕
Lane 1
30SYS-0430E

The multi production settings are required in the job to enable the settings.

8.2.11 Specifying settings for reducing auto calibration time

when exchanging heads
This reduces the auto calibration time when heads are exchanged.

Normally, auto calibration is performed when heads are exchanged. However, when there are calibration
results saved from using a head previously on a module, it is used again and calibration is not performed.

01SYS-0586E

• [Shorten auto calibration when replacing heads]: [ON]

266 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.2.12 Preventing dropped nozzles due to using feeder buttons

There is a possibility that a nozzle may catch in a tape cavity if the tape is indexed by using the feeder
buttons while the head is picking from that tape during production.

There is a possibility that a nozzle may catch in a tape cavity if the tape is indexed by using the feeder
buttons while the head is picking from that tape during production.

㹎㹕㹐 㹃㹐㹐
01NST-1030

01NST-1031-E

• [Disable feeder buttons during production to prevent dropped nozzles]: [Prevent drop]

This function is used for modules that have H01 and H02(F) heads. It is necessary to use the following
firmware versions or higher on the feeders.

W04b, W08b/W08c Feeder (W04b/W08b/W08c) V1.22 or higher

W04f, W08f Feeder (W04f/W08f) V4.39 or higher
W8, W12(c) to W104 Feeder V3.21 or higher

Caution
If the firmware for a feeder is old and it is not changed, an error will occur when the feeder is set on a machine that is using this function.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 267

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.2.13 Supply guidance priority settings

This specifies the guidance order when it is necessary to replenish trays and feeders at side 1 or side 2 of
the machine.

01SYS-0813E

• [Supply Guidance Priority]: Select either [Display order by side] or [Display always tray supply]

• [Display always tray supply] is disabled when performing multi production.

[Display order by side]

Select this option when there are operators at side 1 and side 2.

When tray supply is completed, guidance for supplying feeder parts is then displayed on the operation
panel.

Even if parts need to be supplied on the opposite side, part supply guidance for the feeders on the enabled
side have priority and are displayed.

[Display always tray supply]

Select this option when there is one operator for supplying parts at side 1 and side 2.

If tray parts need to be supplied on the opposite side, guidance for supplying the tray parts has priority and
is displayed even if part supply for feeders on the enabled side has not been completed.

The operator can check the parts that are required for the other side, collect these parts and then move to
the other side to supply parts. This helps reduce the distance that the operator has to move.

268 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.2.14 Check the remaining part quantities when changing

alternate feeders
This allows you to use the feeder with the least remaining parts when changing to an alternate feeder. This
allows you to reduce the quantity of partial reels when the same part is set in multiple feeders.

01SYS-1062-E

• [Check the remaining part quantities when changing alternate feeders]: [Used]

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 269

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.2.15 Specifying the setting for feeder exchange guidance for

giving the priority to cycle time
It is necessary to change to a W04f or W08f feeder which has the feeder firmware updated to the latest
version (V4.54 or later), when producing in productivity priority mode using an H24S head. If this setting is
specified, feeder exchange guidance is displayed when productivity priority mode is selected for H24S
heads.

Note
Refer to "Using productivity priority mode" from the "Job Builder" chapter in the "AIMEX Series Programming Manual" for details about
specifying settings for productivity priority mode.

1. To display guidance for feeder exchange, select "Guide" for [Provide guidance to set cycle time
priority feeders] in [Changeover guidance settings] in [Operation settings] in the machine
configuration.

01SYS-1065E

• [Provide guidance to set cycle time priority feeders]: "Do not guide", "Guide"

270 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.3 Module configuration settings

Any changes to the settings made for the modules are only used for the selected modules.

1. Select the module(s) to change.

2. Click [Module Configuration] to display the [Module Configuration] screen.

30SYS-1151-E

3. When an item is selected at the [Category] selection box, the settings shown under the list
automatically change to match the selected category.

Category Setting
Operation settings Premounted parts height settings
Parts reject operation
Nozzle defect detection
Nozzle statistical error settings
Interval stop setting
Read condition settings for Fujitrax Profiler Panel IDs
Breakdown operation settings
Placement point check function
Auto recovery function
Rescue function when the recovery limit is reached setting
Use Auto Splicing Unit
LCR checks
DX Protector
Panel conveyance settings Panel stopping position correction (module)
Panel stop offset
Tray unit settings Tray Unit LT/LTW, M pickup pressure setting
Tray Feeder Unit L, M pickup pressure setting

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 271

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Category Setting
Optional unit settings Tape cutter/waste tape box unit settings
Auto backup pin settings
Dip settings Dipping
Flux unit settings
Calibration settings Feeder pickup height setting
Thermal measurement for panels that require production over a
long time
Placement angle measurement
Hybrid calibration
Detect foreign objects on hybrid calibration jig parts
Reduce Hybrid Calibration Time
Thermal expansion correction when operating Part-camera-less
employment
Provisional measurement without matrix data function
OFC thermal expansion measurement
Measurement for improving part pickup
(This setting is only for H24/H12HS/V12 heads.)
Nozzle diameter
Remote command operation Mark camera image capture

4. Specify the necessary settings using the options available. For details on the settings, refer to the
explanation list below the settings.

5. After all required settings have been specified, click [Send to Machine].

6. Once all changed settings have been sent to the machine, click [Close].

272 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.3.1 Nozzle statistical error settings

When using this function and the pickup error count for a nozzle exceeds the specified value, that nozzle is
exchanged for another nozzle.

30SYS-0212E

• [Change nozzles when statistical errors occur]: [Change nozzles]

• [Error count to decide statistical nozzle errors]: [Number of failed pickups before statistical error
occurs]

To enable this function, set spare nozzles in the nozzle station.

8.3.2 Breakdown operation settings

If a servo motor or other unit in a module is broken, this function allows you to use the conveyor only on the
module and continue production.

30SYS-0188E

• [Breakdown operation mode]: select [Conveyor only]

To enable this function, edit the job being used in production in the host system. Feeders and sequences
allocated to the non-functional module must be allocated to other modules.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 273

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.3.3 Auto backup pin settings

This function uses a picker mounted in the placing head to pickup automatic backup pins from the stocker
and place them on the backup plate.

30SYS-0191E

• [Auto backup pins]: [Used]

• [Numbers of auto backup pins for lane 1]: Number of backup pins used (1 to 22)

• [Numbers of auto backup pins for lane 2]: Number of backup pins used (1 to 22)

The job must be edited to enable these settings. Specify the backup pin positions and that they are to be
used in the machine configuration of the job. Refer to the Nexim Instruction Manual for details.

Note
When using Fuji Flexa, refer to the AIMEX Series Programming Manual.

8.3.4 Settings for hybrid calibration

Hybrid calibration is a function for measuring and correcting placing deviations using a dedicated stand and
jigs.

30SYS-0224E

• [Hybrid calibration]: [Used]

To enable this function, set the required special nozzle jigs in the nozzle station before operation. Refer to
"4.5.4 Nozzle list" for details regarding nozzle jigs.

274 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.3.5 Specifying the panel quantity to display waste tape

cleaning guidance
The waste tape in the waste tape box needs to be occasionally removed for continuous production. By
specifying this setting, operators are prompted to clean the waste tape boxes through the operation panel.

30SYS-0812E

• [Quantity to produce before displaying waste tape cleaning guidance]: 0 to 9999 (panels)

Each time production of the specified quantity of panels is reached, guidance to clean the waste tape box
is displayed on the operation panel.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 275

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.3.6 LCR check settings

When using the LCR check function and production is started, before placing a new part, a part is checked
with an LCR meter and if the results of the measurement do not comply with the constraints specified in the
job, the part is not used. This can minimize the occurrences of faulty panels through the misplacement of
resistors (R), inductors (L), and condensers (C).

Specifying settings to perform LCR checks

Select the target parts for which LCR check is performed.

01SYS-1071-E

Setting Explanation
Check changed parts Perform LCR checks only for target parts changed during
changeover after a new job is transmitted.
Check all parts Perform LCR checks for all target parts after a new job is
transmitted.
Do not check any parts Do not perform LCR checks for any parts.

Caution

1. When [Do not check any parts] is specified, LCR checks are not performed even for jobs in which LCR checks are specified.
Normally, specify either "Check changed parts" or "Check all parts". When these are selected, whether or not an LCR check is
performed for a part is determined based on the part data setting.
2. Retransmit the job to the machine when settings are changed.

Specifying the number of times to perform recovery when LCR checks fail.

Parts are measured by the LCR meter and it is determined whether they pass or fail. When performing
recovery measurements for parts that fail, specify the following setting in the machine configuration from
Accessory Software.

01SYS-1072-E

• [Recovery count when LCR check fails]: "0 to 9"

276 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

Note
1. Recovery is not performed, if "0" is specified.
2. When this setting is changed, the new recovery count is applied from the next pickup.

8.3.7 Specifying part reject operation settings

It is possible to specify to check for the presence of reject parts before and after rejecting. There are two
different settings.

01SYS-1080E

Settings Explanation
Check if error parts are dropped For when using a head with IPS and a part is to be rejected due
before rejecting to an error detected from the vision processing or IPS system,
specify whether to check to see if the error part has not dropped
before it is rejected is performed. When this function is used, the
cycle time increases slightly. Applicable heads: V12, V12D,
H12HSQ, H12L, H24
Check for parts remaining on the Specify whether to check for parts remaining on the nozzle after
nozzle after rejecting rejecting. When this function is used, the cycle time increases
slightly. Applicable heads: V12, H24

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 277

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.3.8 Specifying nozzle defect detection

When using nozzle defect detection, an error code (8407) is displayed and an error stop occurs if a broken
nozzle is detected during production (if the nozzle length is shorter than the tolerance value). Pickup errors
caused by broken nozzles can be prevented by using this function.

To display guidance for exchange, specify a tolerance value for [Broken or stuck nozzle tolerance value] in
the [Operation settings] category in the module configuration settings. (Recommended value: -0.2 mm)

Note
This function is disabled when 0 mm is specified.

01SYS-1084E

Note
This setting is enabled only when using H24, H12HSQ, or V12 heads.

278 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.4 Data acquisition

If a problem that cannot be resolved arises when using the machine, trace data and images that may be
useful in resolving problems can be acquired from the machine.

8.4.1 Acquiring trace data

Acquiring trace data is a two step process. The first step is to get the trace data from the module to the
server. The second step is to get the data from the server to the local computer.

For details on how to acquire trace data, refer to section "4. Acquiring machine trace data" in "Chapter 6
Machine Accessories" of the Accessory Software Operation Manual (online).

NXTAS0022bE

8.4.2 Acquiring images

If a vision problem is encountered during production, the image file of the part can be a great help in
troubleshooting.

When getting data from the machine, two modes are available. In one mode, only the images that resulted
in error are displayed. In the second mode, all images in the module are displayed. Downloaded images
can be viewed with the Viewer software.

For details on how to acquire images, refer to section "5. Troubleshooting vision processing errors" in
"Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" of the Accessory Software Operation Manual (online).

NXTAS0023aE

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 279

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.5 Remote operation

8.5.1 Upgrading unit software

Select [Update software] from the [Remote operation] section of [Menu] to update the software for each unit
loaded on the machine.

Refer to "10.2 Upgrading unit software" for procedures.

8.5.2 Upgrading machine control software

Select [Install machine application] from the [Remote operation] section of [Menu] to update the control
software for the machine.

Refer to "10.1 Upgrading machine control software" for procedures.

8.5.3 Specifying the operation mode

Four modes are available for the operation mode.

Mode Explanation
Production mode Production is performed.
Pass mode Only panel conveyance is performed.
Idle mode (No vision processing, no Parts and marks on the panel are not vision processed, and
feeder indexing) feeders do not index parts.
Idle mode (No panel conveyance, Parts are picked up and feeders index parts. All parts are vision
VT253) processed using vision type 253. In this mode, panels are not
loaded or unloaded between modules. Change the part data in
the job to match the vision type.

1. Select the module or modules that the operation mode is to be specified for and click [Remote
operation].

2. Select the operation mode from the list under [Operation Mode].

280 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

3. Click [Start] and the command is sent to the selected modules.

4. When transmission is completed, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

8.5.4 Conveyor calibration

The conveyor calibration function is used to restore the correct movement of the conveyor if one of the
following errors occurs.

Error code "****0701", "****0703", "****0704", "****0708",

"****071D", "****0752"

Before using conveyor calibration, ensure that the main screen is displayed at the machine operation panel.

1. Select the module on which conveyor calibration is to be performed and click [Remote operation].

2. Select [Conveyor calibration].

30SYS-0349E

3. Click [Start].

4. The dialog box shown below is displayed. Click [OK] to start conveyor calibration.

01SYS-0178E

5. A message is displayed indicating that conveyor calibration was successfully completed. When this
message is displayed, reboot the machine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 281

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

8.5.5 Completing nozzle maintenance

Use the following command to change the status of nozzles in the nozzle station after they have been
cleaned so they can be used again when using the nozzle exchange function.

30SYS-0350E

8.5.6 Forcibly clearing errors

When the machine stops due to problems such as nozzle exchange errors or picker upper limit errors, it is
usually necessary for the operator to remove the MFU-65 or tray unit and clear the error at the operation
panel.

However, if the condition of the machine as it stopped makes it difficult to remove the MFU-65 or tray unit,
error guidance cannot be cleared at the machine. In these cases, errors can be cleared using remote
operation.

Note
Forcibly clearing errors is an emergency procedure. Accordingly, it is recommended that access permission for remote operation in the Security
Tool Editor of Fuji Flexa be restricted to line managers.

1. Select the module with the error and click [Remote operation].

2. Select [Forced error removal] from the list.

30SYS-0351E

3. Click [Start] to clear errors from the selected module.

4. After completing forced error removal, click [Close] to return to the remote operation menu.

282 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 8. Settings and management

8.5.7 Specifying IPS brightness adjustment

There is a function in Accessory Software to set the IPS brightness to the value from when the machine was
shipped. This function can be used at modules with the following heads.

• H08MQ, H12HSQ, H24(G, S),V12

• Firmware V2.01 or higher is required.

Use the [IPS brightness adjustment setting] function after performing head maintenance (such as cleaning
or replacing the fluorescent label, cleaning the lens/prism, or removing the head cover and adjusting the
brightness).

1. Select the module for which you wish to perform the function and click [Remote operation].

2. Click [IPS brightness adjustment setting].

01SYS-0941E

3. Click [Start] to adjust the IPS brightness for the head on the selected module.

4. When complete, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 283

8. Settings and management SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

284 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9. Using software tools

There are extra tools that are available on the AIMEX system media. This section explains how to use the
different software tools.

Software Explanation
Image Viewer This software is used to display the images acquired from the
machine. In addition to being able to display the images, it can also
display the details from vision processing and any errors that
occurred. This software is installed from the system media onto the
client computer. This is found in the ViewerSoft folder in the base
directory.
NetworkSetting This software is used to change the current network settings for a
base. In order to be able to change the network settings, the current
IP address of the base must be known. This software does not need
to be installed. It can be found in the AIMEX\Tool folder on the
system media.
VersionUp This software is used to change the current machine version on the
machine to the version on the system media. In order to start the
upgrade process, the current IP address of the base to upgrade must
be known. This should be used only if the machine control software
cannot be upgraded through Accessory Software. This software
does not need to be installed. It can be found in the AIMEX\Tool
folder on the system media.
EmergencyInstaller This software is used when items cannot be upgraded normally due
to some error. The computer is directly connected to the item to
upgrade and this software is ran. This software does not need to be
installed. It can be found in the AIMEX\Tool folder on the system
media.
TcpIpSetting This software is used to change network settings for a base when the
base is booted in emergency mode. Unlike the NetworkSetting tool,
the current IP address does not need to be known. The software
looks for a base using the default IP address from emergency mode.
This software can be found in the AIMEX\Tool folder on the system
media and needs to be installed.
Motion Adjustment Tool This software is used to display the servo counter position and to
reset the origin positions. This software needs to be installed and is
found in the AIMEX\Tool\AIMEX3 folder on the DVD.
Equipment Check This software is used to acquire information about units from the
specified module, check I/O states and perform single action
operations. This is a tool to support recovery when troubleshooting
and performing maintenance.
MEdit This software is used to perform basic editing of job data. This is
capable of acquiring the job on the machine. After the data has been
edited, it can send it back to the machine as well as save the changes
to the global directory.
Data Checker This software is used to perform a basic check of jobs edited in MEdit
and Fuji Flexa. This should be installed on all computers with Fuji
Flexa that are used to make jobs for AIMEX machines. It is possible
to download the data checker installer from the download section of
Accessory Software.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 285

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Software Explanation
IPS Viewer This software is used to display the images and results taken by the
IPS (Intelligent Parts Sensor) system on heads equipped with the
parts side view recognition function on computers. These images are
acquired from the machine by Accessory Software. It is possible to
check things such as the nozzle condition and the parts pick up
condition in the images and check the parameters used for
determining the results.

9.1 Image Viewer

This is the software used to display and check the vision process results of images acquired from machines.

NXTST0001E

9.1.1 Installing Image Viewer

1. Insert the media with the software in the drive.

2. A window about installing/upgrading is automatically displayed. If this window is not automatically

displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe on the media.

3. From the [For engineering panels] menu, select [Install Support Tools for Engineering Panel
Terminal].

4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Viewer Soft] and then click
[Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when installation is complete, the
final step is displayed.

5. Click [Finish] and installation is complete.

286 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.1.2 Checking images with Image Viewer

1. Click [Start] and then point to [Programs] and then [Image Viewer] and then click [ImageViewer]. A
[ImageView] window opens.

2. Click [Open] from the [File] menu.

3. Locate the location to which the image file from the machine was downloaded.

4. Double-click the file to select that file and display it in the view.

Note
It is also possible to just double-click the downloaded image file to open that image in Image Viewer after installing the software.

5. Click [Display Tablet] from the [Image] menu. The display changes to display the vision processing
results and information.

6. Check any error messages and the condition of the part to help determine the appropriate
countermeasure.

7. When completed checking the data, click [Exit] from the [File] menu to close Image Viewer.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 287

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.2 NetworkSetting
This software is used to change the current network settings for a base.

It is necessary to know the current IP address in order to change the IP address to an IP address that is
appropriate for the network. The software tool, NetworkSetting, is used to change the current network
settings for a machine.

NXTST0002E

9.2.1 Changing network settings

1. Insert the software media into the drive and open it though Explorer.

2. Double-click [AIMEX] to open that folder.

3. Double-click NetworkSetting.exe to start the software.

4. When requested, enter the IP address of the machine for which to change the network settings and
then click [OK].

Note
If the current IP address of the machine is unknown, use the information command found in manual mode on one of the modules to display the
current IP address for the machine.

5. Specify the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway in the appropriate text boxes and click
[Next].

Note
Even if not changing any of these items, these values must be entered using the current values.

6. Specify the host name for the machine and then enter any domain information if a domain is used.

7. Click [Next].

8. Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate text boxes if these are used.

9. Once all settings have been completed, click [OK] and the new settings are sent to the machine.

10. Reboot the NXT-2 machine to enable the new network settings.

288 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.3 VersionUp
If the machine control software cannot be upgraded through Accessory Software then this software is used
to change the current machine version on the machine to the version on the media. The current IP address
of the base to upgrade must be known.

NXTST0003E

Refer to "10.1.2 Using VersionUp.exe" for procedures.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 289

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.4 EmergencyInstaller
This software is used when the machine is not working properly due to a problem such as the one below.

Note
Installation of the machine application software was interrupted due to a power outage or network communication error.

In this case, CPU recovery must be performed. Connect the CPU with the problem to a computer and install
the machine application software using Emergency Installer.

NXTST0005a

CPU locations are shown below.

• AIMEX-3

Facing robot module Single robot module

Side 1 Side 1
30SYS-1117

• AIMEX-3c

Facing robot module Single robot module

Side 1 Side 1
30SYS-1088

290 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.4.1 Preparation procedures

Perform the following work first.

1. Prepare the machine application DVD. Use the media with the same version as that already installed
at the machine.

2. After CPU recover, module configuration settings in Accessory Software must be specified again.
Make a note of the settings beforehand if you wish to use the same settings.

3. Turn off the main switch and remove the covers and ducts to access the front of the CPU you wish to
work on. Refer to "7. Replacing parts" in the mechanical reference manual for details.

4. Prepare a cross ethernet cable. The cable must be long enough to connect the computer to the
module.

Note
Depending on the computer being used, it may also be possible to use a straight cable.

9.4.2 Running the installer

Recovering a CPU
1. Connect the CPU box and computer using the cable.

2. Change the IP address for the computer to 169.254.0.200.

3. Move the toggle switch to the left. This means that the next time the item is turned on, it will boot in
emergency mode. When recovering CPUs on twin robot modules, move the toggle switch to the left
for the adjacent CPU too.

01SYS-0944

4. Turn on the main switch for the machine.

Note
If a boot error screen displays at the operation panel for machines with twin robot modules, check that both CPU toggle switches are set to the
left position.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 291

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5. Perform the following steps.

a. Push POWER.

b. Check that "SELFCHECK PASS" displays after a few seconds. Contact your Fuji representative if
"SELFCHECK FAIL MODULE" displays.

Note
The display may become scrambled after POWER is pushed. Press the monitor button on the operation panel.

6. Insert the software media into the drive and open it though Explorer.

7. Double-click [AIMEX] and then [Tool] to open the folder with the installer.

8. Double-click EmergencyInstaller.exe to start the software.

NXTST0005a

9. Click [...] and use the dialog box that displays to locate the bin file for the CPU being upgraded. Select
the file for the unit being upgraded and click [Open]. The path and files displays in the text box.

Bin file to select

AIMEX\FujiInstSoft\Fuji\System3\Program\System\module3.bin

10. Click [Install] and the file is installed on the item in question. After installation is completed, a message
displays.

11. Click [OK] to close the message.

12. When recovering CPUs on twin robot modules, switch the cable to the adjacent CPU and repeat steps
5 to 11.

13. Turn off the main power switch for the base.

14. Change the toggle switch on the CPU box back to the left position.

15. Disconnect the cable you connected to the CPU and re-connect the original cable.

16. Change the computer IP address back to the original value.

292 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

After recovering a CPU

The following procedures are required.

a. Transmit the job

b. Remeasure calibration data

c. Module configuration settings

Note
When the CPU box is replaced, it is necessary to also register matrix data and the feeder pallet levelness data. Refer to "6. Machine calibration
data" and "12. Feeder pallet level measurement" in "Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" in the online Accessory Software Operation Manual.

Before proceeding with these procedures, ensure that there are no nozzles on the placing head and no
panels in the modules. Once this has been confirmed, turn on the main switch for the machine and follow
the procedures below.

1. Check the serial number for the target module.

2. Specify the module configuration settings in Accessory Software that were noted before the
procedures in this section were performed.

3. Transmit the job from the host system to the machine.

4. Set the nozzle jigs in the nozzle station and then specify that the calibration data is to be remeasured.
Refer to "Remeasure Calibration Data" in the Accessory Software Online manual for details.

5. Push START on the operation panel to start calibration.

Note
Ensure that the main switch has been on and the module has been powered on for more than 30 minutes prior to performing this step. This
ensures that temperature for the parts camera is warm.

6. If a manual final offset is required, then measure the PAM data on the machine and then send the
calculated final offset file to the machine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 293

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.5 TcpIpSetting
This software is used to change network settings for a base when the base is booted in emergency mode.

NXTST0007E

CPU locations are shown below.

• AIMEX-3

Facing robot module Single robot module

Side 1 Side 1
30SYS-1117

• AIMEX-3c

Facing robot module Single robot module

Side 1 Side 1
30SYS-1088

294 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.5.1 Preparation procedures

Perform the following work first.

1. Prepare the machine application DVD.

2. Turn off the main switch and remove the covers and ducts to access the front of the CPU you wish to
work on. Refer to "Replacing a CPU box" in "7. Replacing parts" in the mechanical reference for
details.

3. Prepare a cross ethernet cable. The cable must be long enough to connect the computer to the
machine.

Note
Depending on the computer being used, it may also be possible to use a straight cable.

9.5.2 Setting procedure

1. Connect the CPU box and computer using the cable.

2. Change the IP address for the computer to 169.254.0.200.

3. Move the toggle switch to the right. This means that the next time the item is turned on, it will boot in
emergency mode. For twin robot machines, move the toggle switch to the right for the adjacent CPU
too.

01SYS-0944

4. Turn on the main switch for the machine.

5. Insert the software media into the drive and open it though Explorer.

6. Double-click [AIMEX] and then [Tool] to open the folder with the installer.

7. Double-click [TcpIpSetting.exe].

8. Specify the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway in the appropriate text boxes.

9. Specify the host name for the machine and then enter any domain information if a domain is used.

10. Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate text boxes if these are used.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 295

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11. Once all settings have been completed, click [Apply] and the new settings are sent to the machine.

12. Click [Exit] to quit the software.

13. Turn off the main power switch for the base.

14. Change the toggle switch on the CPU box back to the left position.

15. Change the computer IP address back to the original value.

16. Reboot the NXT-2 machine to enable the new network settings.

296 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.6 Motion Adjustment Tool

This software is used to save trace data and display the servo counter position.

9.6.1 Installing Motion Adjustment Tool

Install this software on the computer first.

If an old version is installed on the computer, delete the old version beforehand and then perform this work.
If there is an old version still on the computer, the message shown below will display.

01SYS-1026-E

Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Runtime Libraries SP1 must be installed on the computer on which this software
is to be used. If it is not installed, run vcredist_x86.exe included in the package.

1. Insert the software DVD-ROM into the drive and open it though Explorer.

2. Start setup.exe. This file is stored in the following folder.

• "AIMEX" - "TOOL" - "AIMEX3"

3. Install the software with the wizard.

4. A shortcut for Mini Motion Tool is created on the desktop when installation is completed.

9.6.2 Starting Motion Adjustment Tool

1. Start Motion Adjustment Tool.

2. Select [Connect] from the [Communication] menu.

01SYS-0937

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 297

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3. A dialog box displays. Enter the IP address and module number to which to connect and click [OK].

01SYS-0938

4. Once connected, information for the connected unit is displayed in the window.

01SYS-0939

5. The display of the functions for operating status viewing and adjusting can be changed by selecting
the appropriate tab.

01SYS-0940

a. Status view function list

Function Description
Save Trace Data Saves trace data.
Clear Trace Data Clears trace data.
Gathering Settings Used to specify gathering data collection parameters.
Stop Gathering / Restart Used to stop and restart gathering data.
Gathering
Save Gathering Data Saves collected gathering data to a file.
Save Controller Dump Outputs a controller dump file.
Alarm Information Displays current drive alarms.
Controller Errors Displays current controller errors.

298 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Function Description
Servo Network Information Displays servo network information.
Axis State Displays axis status, actual position, specified position, etc.
Motor Information Displays the electrical angle, load ratio, regenerative load ratio, etc.
Analog Monitor Settings Used to change analog monitor output settings and to start monitor
output.
Servo I/O status Displays servo I/O status.

b. Adjustment function list

Function Description
MT Reset Performs an MT reset of axes which have an absolute rotary
encoder.
Origin setting Resets the origin of axes which have a linear scale encoder.
Detect Magnetic Pole Detects the magnetic pole of axes which have a linear scale encoder.
Axis Calibration Parameter Reads offsets values.
Settings

9.6.3 Operating status view functions

Start Adjustment Tool and connect to the module, then perform the following steps.

Saving trace data

1. Right-click the connected module (IP address and module number) displayed in the tree pane.

2. Select [Trace Data] - [Save Trace Data] from the displayed menu.

3. Specify the location and name to save the file and click [Save].

Saving controller dump data

1. Right-click [Controller 0] under the [Controller] tree displayed in the tree pane.

2. Select [Save Controller Dump] from the displayed menu.

3. Specify the location and name to save the file and click [Save].

Using gathering settings

1. Double-click [Gathering Settings] under the [Controller] tree displayed in the tree pane.

2. The gathering setting window is displayed in the right pane.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 299

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

3. Use the [File] menu to read and save settings. Also, use the [Function] menu to collect, stop, or restart
parameters.

Displaying servo network information

1. Double-click either of the following under the [Servo Network] tree displayed in the tree pane.

• Network Information (current)

• Network Information (on wake)

• Network Information (on error)

2. Servo network information is displayed in the right pane.

Displaying controller error information

1. Double-click [Controller Error] under the [Motor] tree displayed in the tree pane.

2. Controller error information is displayed in the right pane.

Displaying servo IO status

1. Double-click [Controller] under the [Servo IO] tree displayed in the tree pane.

2. Servo IO status is displayed in the right pane.

300 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.6.4 Operating adjustment functions

Start Motion Adjustment Tool and connect to the module, then perform the following steps.

Performing a MT Reset
1. Double-click [MTReset] displayed in the tree pane.

2. The MT Reset window is displayed in the right pane.

Do not use this function unless directed by Fuji or a Fuji representative. This function clears the turn count
for the absolute encoder on the motor. Using this function may result in damage to the machine.

Using origin setting

1. Double-click [Zero Set] displayed in the tree pane.

2. The zero set window is displayed in the right pane.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 301

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.7 Equipment Check

This software is used to acquire information about units from the specified module, check I/O states and
perform single action operations. This is a tool to support recovery when troubleshooting and performing
maintenance.

30SYS-0374E

9.7.1 Installing Equipment Check

1. Insert the media with the software in the drive.

2. A window about installing/upgrading is automatically displayed. If this window is not automatically

displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe in the media.

3. From the [For engineering panels] menu, select [Install Support Tools for Engineering Panel
Terminal].

4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Equipment Check] and
then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when installation is
complete, the final step is displayed.

5. Click [Finish] and installation is complete.

302 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.7.2 Checking machines on a production line

Start Equipment Check on the computer being used to troubleshoot problems that have occurred at a
module on a production line to check the condition of the unit.

First, select the machine to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box. Also, in the [Select module]
pane of the [Equipment check] window, and follow the steps in "9.7.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and
sensors" below to check the relevant items.

30SYS-0375E

Note
Before checking a tray unit-LTW(2), ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be used in production in the magazine.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 303

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.7.3 Checking machines not on a production line

The operation of modules not on a production line such as in a maintenance room that is not being managed
by the host system can be checked. Start Equipment Check on a computer that is not on the line and check
the condition of the unit.

First, specify the base IP address of the unit to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box. Also, in
the [Select module] pane of the [Equipment check] window, and follow the steps in "9.7.4 Checking the
conditions of I/Os and sensors" below to check the relevant items.

30SYS-0376E

Note
Before checking a tray unit-LTW(2), ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be used in production in the magazine.

Note
Select the actual number of the robot at the machine because an image of the module does not display.

Side 2 Side 2 Side 2 Side 2

1 3 5 7

2 4

Side 1 Side 1 Side 1 Side 1

30SYS-0691E

304 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.7.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors

For conveyors
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Conveyor sensor status] from the [Menu] pane.

2. In the [Select stage] group box, select the check boxes for the stages to check.

3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push START. The
machines checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to stop the machine.

4. Click [Start]. The conditions of the sensors is displayed.

Tray unit-LTW(2)
1. Select [Adjustment mode start] from the [Menu] pane.

Note
If the machine is already in adjustment mode, then this command is not necessary.

2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-LTW] - [I/O status check] from the [Menu] pane.

3. Click [Start]. The conditions of the sensors is displayed.

4. When you have completed checking, click [Adjustment mode end] from the [Menu] pane and the
module returns to normal operation mode.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 305

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

For bases and modules

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane and then select the applicable item.

2. I/O monitor displays.

01SYS-0346E

a. [Input signals]

• A green indicator means the input is on and a white indicator means the input is off.

b. [Output signals]

• A green indicator means the output is on and a white indicator means the output is off. If the [Output
operation] option is checked, the selected module item is locked and it is possible to change the
output signal status.

c. [Ring] settings

• [Ring] is used to enable a sound when an input is on. Select the item for which you want to enable
the sound and then click [Ring].

d. [ON/OFF]

• [ON/OFF] is used to change the status of an output. Select the check box for [Output operation] and
then select the output you wish to change and click [ON/OFF] to change the output status.

306 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.7.5 Checking the operation of units

For conveyors
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Operation type] from the [Menu] pane and then select the operation
item.

2. In the [Select stage] group box, select the check boxes for the stages to check.

3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push START. The
machines checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to stop the machine.

4. Click [Start]. Refer to the section "9.7.8 Conveyor command list" in this manual for details about the
actions.

For tray unit-LTWs

1. Select [Adjustment mode start] from the [Menu] pane.

Note
If the module is already in adjustment mode, then this command is not necessary.

2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-LTW] - [Operation type] from the [Menu] pane and then select the
operation item.

3. Click [Start]. Refer to the section "9.7.7 Tray unit-LTW command list" in this manual for details about
the actions.

4. When you have completed checking the operation, click [Adjustment mode end] from the [Menu] pane
and the module returns to normal operation mode.

For bases and modules

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane and then select the applicable item.

2. Select the check box for [Output operation].

3. Select the item to operate from the list.

4. Click [ON/OFF].

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 307

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.7.6 Checking the tray unit-LTW calibration values

1. Select [Adjustment mode start] from the [Menu] pane.

Note
If the module is already in adjustment mode, then this command is not necessary.

2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-LTW] - [Calibration data] from the [Menu] pane and then select the item
you wish to set.

3. Click [Start]. Refer to the section "9.7.7 Tray unit-LTW command list" in this manual for details about
the actions.

4. When you have completed setting values, click [Adjustment mode end] from the [Menu] pane and the
module returns to normal operation mode.

9.7.7 Tray unit-LTW command list

Command Name Explanation
(Acquire information)
Unit information Used to check the [Serial No.] and [Firmware Version].
Servo counter Used to check the current servo counter value. (Not updated in real
time.)
I/O status check Used to check the current I/O status. (Not updated in real time.)
RFID reading results Displays the drawer ID (FIDL) for all subslots. (Currently not supported)
• In order to read RFIDs, it is necessary for both the machine and tray
unit-LT to support RFIDs.

Command name Explanation

(Operation check)
Retract position Stores the drawer in the magazine and moves the TZ axes to the retract
positions.
• If there is no job that is using a tray unit-LTW, operation is not possible.
Reject parts conveyor Used to check the reject parts conveyor operation. Specify the distance
to move the conveyor (parts). (Range: 1 - 200 mm)
Specified slot pickup position Used to check the operation that moves the tray drawer for the specified
slot to the pickup point.

• A job using a tray unit-LTW is required. Only slots used in the job can
be used.

• Perform after running the verify command.

308 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Command name Explanation

(Operation check)
Single action positioning Used to check the following TZ and TY axis operations.
a. Advance the shuttle for the current slot position

b. Move the magazine to the specified slot position

c. Advance the shuttle for the specified slot position

d. Store shuttle

e. Move shuttle continuously back and forward

f. Move magazines continuously up and down (includes linked

magazines)

• A job using a tray unit-LTW is required for "Advance the shuttle for the
specified slot position".

• Perform these checks after running the verify command.

Movement to level Move magazine B to the position for placing the spirit level when
adjustment position performing level adjustment.
Verify Used to perform verification and check the results.

• A job using a tray unit-LTW is required. Only slots used in the job can
be used.

Command name Explanation

(Calibration related)
Calibration data check Used to check the current calibration data.
TZ-axis origin setting Used to set the TZ-axis origin. (Currently not supported)
TY-axis origin setting Used to set the TY-axis origin. (Currently not supported)
Calibration data setting Used to set calibration data for the specified table number.
• When entering calibration data, the units used are um but these values
are converted into pulses internally. When checking calibration data,
there are cases of conversion deviations occurring.
Tray height check sensor Used to measure the attachment height of the tray height check sensor
measurement for the specified magazine. (Currently not supported)
• Special jigs are required to measure this setting.
Serial number setting Used to specify the serial number.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 309

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.7.8 Conveyor command list

Command name Explanation
(Status check)
Conveyor sensor status Used to check the status of the following conveyor sensors.

1. Conveyor panel pass check sensor L

2. Conveyor panel pass check sensor R

3. Panel unclamp check sensor

4. Conveyor backup pin detection sensor

• A check cannot be performed if automatic operation has not been

commenced even once after booting up the machine. Clear all panels
by using the machine manual commands.

Command name Explanation

(Operation check)
Clamp Used to check the clamp operation for the specified lane.
• A check cannot be performed if automatic operation has not been
commenced even once after booting up the machine. Clear all panels
by using the machine manual commands.
Unclamp Used to check the unclamp operation for the specified lane.
• A check cannot be performed if automatic operation has not been
commenced even once after booting up the machine. Clear all panels
by using the machine manual commands.
Rail Used to check the specified rail movement.
Panel conveyance Used to check the panel conveyance operation for the specified lane.
Specify the lane to be checked and the movement distance.
Continuous clamp operation The clamp at the specified lane can be moved up and down repeatedly
between 1 and 1,000,000 times.
• Push EMERGENCY STOP at the machine if you want to stop the
continuous clamping operation.

Command name (Adjusting) Explanation

Panel pass sensor sensitivity Used to adjust the sensitivity of the panel pass sensors.
adjustment

310 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.7.9 Single action positioning operations

When checking the shuttle operation

Operation mode name Description
Advance the shuttle for the [Actions]
current slot position
Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position for the current slot
position.

• The offset TY minus value is toward the operator.

• An error will occur if the shuttle is unable to move due to the positional
relationship with the TZ-axis.
Move shuttle continuously [Actions]
back and forward
Moves the shuttle continuously to and from the advance and retract
ends for the current slot position.

• An error will occur if the shuttle is unable to move due to the positional
relationship with the TZ-axis.

When checking the magazine operation

Operation mode name Explanation
Move magazine to specified [Actions]
slot position
Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.

• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to the

positional relationship with the TY axis.
Move magazine continuously [Actions]
up and down
Moves the magazine continuously to and from the upper and lower
ends.

• For tray unit-LTW(2)s, operation can be performed with magazines A

& B linked together.

• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to the

positional relationship with the TY axis.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 311

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

When simultaneously checking the shuttle and magazine

operation
Operation mode name Description
Advance the shuttle for the [Actions]
specified slot position
1. Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.

2. Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position.

When storing the advanced tray drawer in the magazine

Operation mode name Description
Store the shuttle [Actions]
Stores the advanced shuttle in the magazine.

• The slot that was pulled out is the slot that the tray drawer is stored in.

312 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.7.10 Checking the unit configuration

[Equipment check] can be used during production to check unit information such as information about
nozzles set on modules, the serial number of each unit, and firmware versions.

Checking the nozzle station and condition of nozzles in modules

1. First, select the machine to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box.

30SYS-0377E

2. Select [Unit configuration] - [Nozzle information] from the [Menu] pane.

3. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane. [Nozzle unit information] displays.

30SYS-0378E

a. The following information can be checked here.

• Nozzle station information: Unit type, serial number

• Nozzle information: Unit type (and serial number), usage condition for current job

b. Nozzles not being used in the current job are colored gray.

c. For nozzles without registered spec data, only the serial number is displayed.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 313

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Checking items such as feeder pallet, feeder, and tray unit

versions
1. First, select the machine to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box.

30SYS-0377E

2. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane.

3. Select [Unit configuration] - [Device information] from the [Menu] pane. [Device unit information]
displays.

30SYS-0379E

a. The following information can be checked here.

• Feeder pallet information: Version

• Feeder information: Feeder ID, serial number, and version

• Tray unit-LTW information: Serial number, version

• Tray unit-M information: Serial number, version

314 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Checking items such as module, head, and camera versions

1. First, select the machine to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box.

30SYS-0377E

2. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane.

3. Select [Unit configuration] - [Other information] from the [Menu] pane.

30SYS-0380E

a. The following information can be checked here.

• Module information: Unit type, serial number, and version

• Head information: Position, unit type, serial number, and version

• Conveyor information: Unit type, serial number, bank and interface board version

• Camera information: Unit type, serial number, and version

• Pressure calibration unit information: Version, calibration value, and filter frequency

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 315

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Refreshing unit information

Use the following procedure to refresh the unit information being displayed.

1. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane.

2. Click [Refresh]. [Device information], [Nozzle information], and [Other information] for the selected
module are all refreshed.

30SYS-0381E

Exporting unit information to a text file

Unit information can be exported to a text file. Use the following procedure to do this.

1. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane.

2. Click [Export] and specify the directory where to save the file. All the information for the selected
module is saved to a text file.

30SYS-0382E

316 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.8 MEdit
MEdit can be used to perform basic job editing and to test the job. This is capable of acquiring the job on
the machine and after the data has been edited, to send it back to the machine as well as save the changes
to the global directory.

Caution
If a job currently being used in production is edited in Fuji Flexa and sent to the machine using MEdit, be aware that problems such as
incorrect placements or missing parts may occur during production.

Refer to "5. Editing Jobs on the Machine (MEdit)" in the AIMEX series Programming Manual for details
regarding MEdit.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 317

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.9 IPS Viewer

IPS Viewer is used to display on computers the IPS images and results taken by heads equipped with the
IPS (Intelligent Parts Sensor) system. This tool needs a head with the part side recognition function set on
the machine.

01NST-0430

9.9.1 Installing IPS Viewer

IPS Viewer is on the system media.

1. Insert the media disk into the drive of the computer on which you want to install the software.

2. A window about installing/upgrading is automatically displayed. If this window is not automatically

displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe in the media.

3. From the [For engineering panels] menu, select [Install Support Tools for Engineering Panel
Terminal].

4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [IPSViewer] and then click
[Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when installation is complete, the
final step is displayed.

01NST-0431

5. Click [Finish] and installation is complete.

318 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

9.9.2 IPS Viewer window elements

The IPS Viewer window is comprised of the following items.

Menu bar
Toolbar

IPS Image pane Properties pane

Menu bar: All operations, such as opening files and selecting the display area,
can be performed by using the menu bar.
Toolbar: Frequently used commands contained in the menu bar can be accessed
directly from the toolbar.
IPS image pane: Images captured by the IPS and the measurement results
display in this pane.
Properties pane: Items such as measurement results and parameters for
measurement timing display in this pane. 01NST-0432E

9.9.3 Basic IPS Viewer operation

It is necessary to acquire the IPS image from the machine before using IPS Viewer. Use one of the following
methods to acquire the IPS image file from the machine by using Accessory Software.

• Display the [Vision processing error analysis] screen from Floor Monitor and specify the slot to for
images to be acquired.

• Using the image acquisition command to acquire the trace data along with IPS images.

Note
For details on these methods, refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual chapter 2, section "5. Vision processing error analysis" and
chapter 6, section "4. Acquiring machine trace data"

Opening an IPS file

Use one of the methods below to open an IPS file after starting IPS Viewer.

• Drag-and-drop the desired IPS file into the IPS Viewer window.

• Select [Open File] from the [File] menu or click the open file button on the toolbar. Specify the
desired IPS file in the [Open File] dialog box.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 319

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Displaying nozzle measurement results

There are three types of IPS images. The displayed contents for each image type differ.

IPS1 IPS2 IPS3

Image for a single nozzle Image for 2 nozzles Image for 4 nozzles
01NST-0433E

From these IPS images, select the desired area to display the measurement results for the applicable
nozzle. To select an area, select one of the area numbers from the toolbar.

Area number

Area
01NST-0434E

The images below illustrate the relationship between the area number and the position of the nozzle inside
the IPS image. IPS1 is fixed at area number 1.

IPS2 IPS3
Area number 3 2 2 3 4 1

Area

01NST-0435E

320 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Enlarging and reducing displayed images

It is possible to enlarge or reduce the image displayed in the IPS image pane by using buttons on the toolbar
or commands from the menu bar.

Change the display size

When this command is active and the image is clicked, the

magnification of the image is increased. It is also possible to drag
Zoom In
the cursor to specify the area of the image that is to be magnified.
Right-click to reduce the magnification of the image.

When this command is active and the image is clicked, the

Zoom Out magnification of the image is reduced.
Right-click to increase the magnification of the image.

Select this command to resize the image to fit the size of the
Fit window.
When this is selected, the zoom in/out operation mode is cleared.

Normal Normal Click this to clear the zoom in/out operation mode.

01NST-0436E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 321

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

9.9.4 Reading the displayed results

It is possible to check the results of the following items in IPS Viewer.

• Dropped part check • Parts remaining on the nozzle

• Tombstone check • Part height check

• Upside-down part check • Nozzle check

• Nozzle position check

The result type contained in the IPS file can be identified in based on the information displayed in [Process
type] in the IPS Viewer properties pane.

Process type
Image acquisition time Before placement
Displays the timing of the measurement After placement
After nozzle changeover
Nozzle presence
After pickup
After dip

If other items display, refer to the IPS

Viewer instruction manual on the
system DVD(CD-ROM) for details.

Check details Part presence

Displays the type of measurement Part height
Measure part height
Nozzle reference position
Nozzle position check (*1)

(*1) There are cases of settings like the following being displayed
for Part presence, Part height, Measure part height.
Part presence + Part height
When this is displayed, the results for these two types of
checks are being displayed at the same time.
01NST-0437E

322 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Dropped part check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the dropped part check result is displayed.

a. Image acquisition time

• After pickup, After dip, Before placement

b. Check details

• Part presence

Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, and part detection lines are displayed.

Example good result Example error result

(Part exists in measurement area) (No part exists in measurement area)

Measurement area

Nozzle position

Part detection line

(bottom of part)

01NST-0438E

Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.

Generic
(*1)
Head number Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement was
performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle position
for which the measurement was performed.
(*1) Feeder ID Displays the slot from which the measured part was picked.
Measurement result
(*1) Threshold value Displays the threshold value for determining whether or not a
part is present.
Detection position Displays the numerical value for the part detection line.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there is an
error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.

Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0439E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 323

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Part remaining on the nozzle check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the part remaining on the nozzle check result
is displayed.

a. Image acquisition time

• After placement

b. Check details

• Part presence

Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, and part detection lines are displayed.

Example good result Example error result

(No part exists in measurement area) (Part exists in measurement area)

Measurement
area

Nozzle position

Part detection line

(bottom of part)

01NST-0440E

Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.

Generic
(*1)
Head number Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement was
performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle position
for which the measurement was performed.
(*1) Feeder ID Displays the slot from which the measured part was picked.
Measurement result
(*1) Threshold value Displays the threshold value for determining whether or not a
part is present.
Detection position Displays the numerical value for the part detection line.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there is an
error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.

Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0439E

324 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Tombstoned check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the tombstoned part check result is displayed.

a. Image acquisition time

• After pickup, Before placement

b. Check details

• Part height

Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, part detection, and tolerance lines are
displayed.

Example good result Example error result

(Part exists within tolerance lines) (Part not within tolerance lines)

Measurement area

Nozzle position

Upper tolerance
line
Part detection line
(bottom of part)

Lower tolerance
line
01NST-0441E

Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.

Generic
Head number
(*1) Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement
was performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle
position for which the measurement was performed.
(*1) Feeder ID Displays the slot from which the measured part was picked.

Measurement result
Detection position Displays the numerical value for the part detection line.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there
is an error result, the related error code displays.
Tolerance
Upper Displays the numerical value for the upper tolerance line.
Lower Displays the numerical value for the lower tolerance line.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.
Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0442E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 325

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Part height check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the part height check result is displayed.

a. Image acquisition time

• After pickup

b. Check details

• Measure part height

Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, and part detection lines are displayed.

Example good result Example error result

(Part exists in measurement area) (No part exists in measurement area)

Measurement area

Nozzle position

Part detection line

(bottom of part)

01NST-0438E

Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.

Generic
Head number
(*1) Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement
was performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle
position for which the measurement was performed.
(*1) Feeder ID Displays the slot from which the measured part was picked.
Measurement result
Detection position Displays the numerical value for the part detection line.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there
is an error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.
Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0443E

326 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Upside-down part check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the upside-down part check result is displayed.

a. Image acquisition time

• After pickup

b. Check details

• Upper-down check

Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, and part detection lines are displayed.

Example good result Example error result

(Part exists in measurement area) (No part exists in measurement area)

Measurement
area

Nozzle position

Lead detection
line

Part detection line

(bottom of part)

01NST-0447E

Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.

Generic
Head number
(*1) Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement
was performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle
position for which the measurement was performed.
(*1) Feeder ID Displays the slot from which the measured part was picked.
Measurement result
Detection position Displays the numerical value for the part detection line.
Lead detection position Displays the numerical value for the detected position
for the lead ends.
Part and lead difference Displays the numerical value for the difference between
the part bottom surface and the lowest point for the lead ends.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there
is an error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.
Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0448E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 327

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Nozzle check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the nozzle check result is displayed.

a. Image acquisition time

• After nozzle changeover

b. Check details

• Nozzle reference position

Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area and nozzle position line are displayed.

Example good result Example error result

(Nozzle exists in measurement area) (No nozzle exists in measurement area)

Measurement
area

Nozzle tip
position

01NST-0444E

Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.

Generic
Head number
(*1) Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement
was performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle
position for which the measurement was performed.
Measurement result
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there
is an error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.
Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0445E

328 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 9. Using software tools

Nozzle position check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the nozzle check result is displayed.

a. Image acquisition time

• Nozzle presence

b. Check details

• Nozzle position check

Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area and nozzle position line are displayed.

Check for nozzle in upper position

Example good result Example error result
(Nozzle exists in measurement area) (No nozzle exists in measurement area)

Measurement
area

Nozzle position

Check for nozzle in lower position

Example good result Example error result
(No nozzle exists in measurement area) (Nozzle exists in measurement area)

Measurement
area

Nozzle position

01NST-0446E

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 329

9. Using software tools SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.

Generic
Head number
(*1) Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement
was performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle
position for which the measurement was performed.
Measurement result
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there
is an error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.
Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0445E

330 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 10. Upgrading Software

10. Upgrading Software

This section explains how to upgrade the machine control software as well as the software for the different
units.

10.1 Upgrading machine control software

When upgrading the machine control software, there are two methods.

a. Use Accessory Software to upgrade the machine control software whenever possible. When
Accessory Software is used, all of the bases that make up a AIMEX "machine" in Fuji Flexa are
upgraded at the same time and module configuration settings are retained.

b. When using VersionUp to upgrade the machine control software, the upgrade process has to be
repeated for each individual base. The machine configuration settings are reset back to the default
settings.

10.1.1 Using Accessory Software

Before this function can be used, the machine control software must first be installed on the computer on
which Accessory Software is installed.

1. Ensure that all of the machines to be upgraded are turned on and that the modules not producing or
performing any special processing.

2. Change to manual mode to perform software loading.

3. Press [Diagnostics] from the manual mode menu.

4. Push the START button. If nozzles are on the head, the nozzles on the heads are automatically
returned to the nozzle station.

01SYS-1070

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 331

10. Upgrading Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

5. Ensure that the following pictogram is displayed on the operation panel.

30SYS-1090

6. Start Accessory Software and display the Floor Monitor page.

7. From Floor Monitor, click the machine for which to upgrade. The Machine Accessories log on page is
displayed.

8. Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.

30SYS-0344E

9. Enter the password for the user and click [Log on]. The main menu is displayed.

10. Select all of the modules and then click [Remote operation].

11. Click [Install machine application].

42SYS-0152-E

12. Select the new version and click [Start updating] to start the installation process.

332 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 10. Upgrading Software

13. After installation is completed, turn off the main switches for the bases.

Note
Turn off the main switch while the following screen is still displayed.

30SYS-1090

14. Restart the machine. After restarting, upgrading the software is started.

Caution
Do not turn off the power to the machine while it is being upgraded.

15. After all of the modules have been upgraded, restart the machine.

Note
After upgrading, ensure that the specified machine and module configuration settings are correct.

10.1.2 Using VersionUp.exe

This software is used to change the current machine version on the base and modules to the version on the
system media. The current IP address of the base to upgrade must be known. This can be performed from
any computer that can connect to the machine over the network and has a DVD drive.

Be sure to record any machine/module configuration settings before performing any of the steps below
because it is necessary to specify these settings again though Accessory Software after upgrading.

1. Ensure that the machine to be upgraded is turned on and that it is not producing or performing any
special processing.

2. Change to manual mode to perform software loading.

3. If nozzles are on the head, return the nozzles back to the nozzle station by following the substeps
below.

a. Press [Exchange] from the manual mode menu.

b. Press [Nozzles].

c. Push START and the nozzles are removed from the head.

d. Press the manual command button when the guidance displays for removing the supply parts unit. It
is not necessary to remove the parts supply unit.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 333

10. Upgrading Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

4. Press [Diagnostics] from the manual mode menu.

5. Press the perform command button.

30SYS-1089

6. Ensure that the following pictogram is displayed on the operation panel.

30SYS-1090

7. Insert the AIMEX software media into the drive and open it though Explorer.

8. Double-click [AIMEX] to open that folder.

9. Double-click VersionUp.exe to start it.

NXTST0003E

10. In the [Operator] text box, enter any text.

11. Enter the IP address of the base for which to upgrade in the [Host name] text box and then click [OK].

334 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 10. Upgrading Software

12. If the target machine is found, a dialog box displays with the current version in the machine and the
new version. If the upgrade process should continue, click [OK]. A dialog box displays with the
upgrade progress.

13. Once all of the files have been copied, a message box displays. Click [OK] to close the message.

14. Turn the machine off at the main switch.

Note
Turn off the main switch while the following screen is still displayed.

30SYS-1090

15. Restart the machine.

16. Upgrading the software is started.

Caution
Do not turn off the power to the machine while it is being upgraded.

17. After all of the modules have been upgraded, restart the machine.

Note
After upgrading, ensure that the specified machine and module configuration settings are correct.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 335

10. Upgrading Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

10.1.3 When unable to upgrade

This section explains what to do if upgrading is not completed due to conditions such as machine power
was turned off while upgrading control software.

When upgrading the machine was not completed

Use the provided EmergencyInstaller software to recover the module CPU.

Refer to " 9.4 EmergencyInstaller " for details.

When upgrading the vision processing board was not completed

Normally, after control software update is completed, the process continues with upgrading the vision
processing board.

If upgrading the vision processing board fails for some reason, the following screen is displayed when
restarting the machine.

01SYS-1027

When this occurs, follow the procedures below to upgrade the vision processing board.

336 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 10. Upgrading Software

1. Turn off the main switch for the base on the machine.

2. Move the toggle switch on the vision processing board to the left position. For twin robot machines,
move the toggle switch to the left for the adjacent vision processing board as well.

01SYS-0944

Facing robot module Single robot module

Side 1 Side 1
30SYS-1117

3. Turn on the main switch for the machine.

4. The machine is started, and the upgrade restart screen is displayed on all the operation panels on
which the toggle switch was changed. Then the upgrade process is restarted.

5. Upgrade all applicable modules, and then turn off the main switch for the base on the machine.

6. Move the toggle switch on the vision processing board back to the original position.

7. Turn on the main switch for the machine. This completes upgrading the vision processing board.

Note
Vision processing recovery upgrading is supported from AIMEX-3(c). AIMEX-2 and AIMEX-2S machines cannot be recovered by performing
this procedure.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 337

10. Upgrading Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

10.2 Upgrading unit software

This command is used to upgrade the software for units such as heads, feeders, and feeder pallets. The
unit to be upgraded must be loaded on a machine to perform the upgrade.

1. Install the software for the units on the computer that has the Accessory Software server installed.

2. Ensure that the machine to be upgraded is turned on and that it is not producing or performing any
special processing.

3. Change to manual mode to perform software loading.

4. If nozzles are on the head, return the nozzles back to the nozzle station by following the substeps
below.

a. Press [Exchange] from the manual mode menu.

b. Press [Nozzles].

c. Push START and the nozzles are removed from the head.

d. Press the manual command button when the guidance displays for removing the supply parts unit. It
is not necessary to remove the parts supply unit.

5. Press [Diagnostics] from the manual mode menu.

6. Press the perform command button.

30SYS-1089

7. Ensure that the following pictogram is displayed on the operation panel.

30SYS-1090

338 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 10. Upgrading Software

8. Start Accessory Software and display the Floor Monitor page.

9. From Floor Monitor, click the machine for which to upgrade the unit software. The Machine
Accessories log on page is displayed.

10. Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.

30SYS-0344E

11. Enter the password for the user and click [Log on]. The main menu is displayed.

12. Select the modules to upgrade and then click [Remote operation].

13. Click [Update software].

14. Click [Start updating] and Accessory Software copies the unit software. The machine automatically
reboots when copying is completed.

15. After rebooting, the screen for selecting the units to upgrade is displayed. Select the unit to upgrade.

Note
To upgrade all units, select [Execute of All].

16. Push the START button. The update process is started.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 339

10. Upgrading Software SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

340 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

11. Troubleshooting
This chapter has the basic procedures for troubleshooting the machine and a list of common issues
encountered.

Contact your Fuji representative for serious problems or repairs that cannot be performed.

11.1 Troubleshooting points

Follow the points below to help speed up the troubleshooting process.

a. Check information related to the error

• Write down any codes so if contacting your Fuji representative is required, the error message codes
can be included.

b. Follow the instructions that display on the operation panel.

• Use the instructions that display on the operation panel to help resolve most issues. If the
instructions are not followed properly, then the procedures on the operation panel may not advance,
or show the wrong steps.

c. Check the most basic items first.

d. Start with the most plausible cause.

e. Check step by step while eliminating possible causes.

11.2 Displaying error related information

In Accessory Software, click the "Error Stop" text that displays in Floor Monitor for the applicable machine.
Information related to the error is displayed.

2 1
30SYS-0373-Eb

In addition, it is possible to check the error information by conducting a search for the error codes displayed
in the operation panel by following the procedures below.

1. In Floor Monitor, click [Error Search] from [Menu] and the page changes to display the error code
search page.

2. Enter the error code that displays on the operation panel in the text box for [Error Code] and click
[Search]. The specified error code is searched for and if located, the page changes to display the
information.

3. To conduct another search, enter the new error code in the text box and click [Search]. To view any
additional details about the error, click [Details] if it is available.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 341

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.3 Troubleshooting Common Problems

11.3.1 Mark vision processing errors

Restart the reading process and change the operation panel to display the vision processing images by
pushing MONITOR. Check the following points when the mark with the error is displayed.

Point Description/countermeasure
Is the mark present? If the mark is not present that can indicate that the mark position in the
job is incorrect or possibly that the panel was loaded incorrectly.
Remove the panel and ensure that it was loaded correctly. Check the
position of the mark and then check the position of the mark in the job
and correct if necessary. If the panel is not stopping in the correct
position, use the panel stopping position correction function.
Is the mark clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the mark and that the mark is clearly
visible. Remove any items covering the mark. This is especially common
for marks read during calibration due to the retractable reference
conveyor tops. If the mark is dark and not clearly visible, check the
lighting of the mark camera. If out of focus, check the panel clamp
condition. If the panel is clamped and the mark is still out of focus or too
dark, replace the mark camera and lighting and try again.
Is the mark within the outer This outer box represents the scan area. If the mark is outside of the
green box? scan area, it cannot be found even if it is perfectly clear. The scan area
should be at least 1.5 times larger than the entire mark. If it is not, open
the job and change the read area.
Does the shape of the mark The green outline indicates the shape of the mark in the job. If the mark
match the green outline? is a different shape than the one expected, the mark will not be found.
Change the shape for the mark data in the job.
Is the mark the same size as The green outline represents not only the shape but also the size
the green outline? expected. If the mark is larger or smaller than specified in the job, it
cannot be found. Check the mark size on the panel and change the mark
data size to be appropriate in the job.
Is the mark very bright or very If the mark is too bright or too dark, the system cannot locate the mark.
dark? Change the fiducial mark read brightness setting in the machine
configuration. Start the Accessory Software client, and then click the
name of the machine in Floor Monitor. Log on and then select [Machine
Configuration]. Select the [Fiducial mark setting] from the category drop-
down list. Change the [Fiducial mark reading brightness setting]. If the
mark is too bright, select the [Less] option. If the mark is too dark, select
the [More] setting. After making the setting, click [Send to machine] to
enable the changes.

These points and countermeasures cover most of the common mark read error causes.

342 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

11.3.2 Part vision processing errors

If vision processing errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.

1. If the machine is still running, push MONITOR to display the image monitor. Ensure that the part was
picked and displays on the monitor. Push MONITOR again to close the image monitor.

2. Check the error message for the error code.

3. Stop the module.

4. Acquire the error image from the module though Accessory Software.

5. Open the image in Image Viewer and check the vision processing results. Check the following points
when the part with the error is displayed.

Point Description/countermeasure
Is the part present? If the part is not present, that indicates a pick up error of some kind.
Check the condition of the feeder and ensure that parts are being
supplied. Ensure that the appropriate nozzle size is being used.
Is the part clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the part and that the part is clearly
visible. Remove any items that are possibly obscuring the view such as
parts on the glass covers for the parts camera. If the part is not clearly
visible, check the lighting and ensure that the correct type of frontlighting
is used for the part. If the part is out of focus or too dark with the correct
lighting being used, replace the part camera unit and try again.
Does the direction of the part The green outline indicates the orientation of the part based on the data
match the green outline? in the job. If the part is rotated, then that indicates that the direction
setting in the part data does not match the packaging direction. Check
the direction that the part is being supplied in the packaging compared
to the setting in the part data. If different, then correct the direction
setting in the part data for the job.
Does the shape/size of the The green outline indicates the shape/size of the part. If the part is a
part match the green outline? different shape or size then that indicates that the wrong part is present
or that the part data is incorrect. Ensure that the part is correct. If the part
is correct, then edit the part data in the job for that part to match the
actual part.
Does the part match the There are several possible causes for this problem. Generally, the
green outline but the green problem is with the pickup tolerance, wrong vision type, or wrong
outline was not moved to p_pattern (usually coarse positioning cannot be performed for errors).
cover the part? Check the shape data in the job for the part and ensure that these
settings are correct.
Does the green outline cover First, ensure that the part is a good part (e.g., no bent/missing leads).
the part but errors still occur? Check the error message for details. Check the positioning of the
elements and the tolerances in the shape data to ensure that they are
specified correctly.

These points and countermeasures cover some of the common part vision error causes.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 343

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.3.3 Pickup errors

If pickup errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.

1. Stop the module.

2. Check the following points.

Point Description/countermeasure
Is the cover tape being taken Check the condition of the cover tape take up. If the cover tape is not
up? taken up properly then it might cover the part thus preventing it from
being picked. Ensure that the cover tape is being peeled back as the
feeder advances. Ensure that the cover tape take up path is correct and
there is more then 10 cm of cover tape extending from the bottom of the
feeder. If any problems are found, then correct them and try pickup
again.
Does the feeder advance Check the advancing of the feeder. Ensure that the green power light
smoothly? Are there any comes on and that the advancing pitch setting is correct. Clean the
problems with the condition of sprocket area and ensure no parts are stuck under the tape leaf area. If
the feeder? there is a problem with the feeder, put the parts on another feeder and
perform maintenance on the current feeder to correct the problem.
Is the nozzle size being used Check the size of the nozzle being used for the part. Ensure that the
for the part appropriate? nozzle is not too big or too small for the part. Ensure that the part has a
flat smooth surface in the area where the nozzle picks at least the size
of the nozzle. If the nozzle size is good but the part still has trouble being
picked by that nozzle, try changing the soft pick speed in the shape data
to pick up the part slower. If this does not work, try the procedures for
the next item.
Is the pickup position good? Use the job test command from manual mode to check the pickup
position for the part. Is the pickup position at the center of the desired
pickup point (usually the center of the body)?
• If the packaging is the cause of the error (such as the cavity in the tape
is shifted), specify a pickup offset at the machine using manual mode
commands.

• If the cause is due to part data (such as a pickup offset is not entered
in shape data), open the current job in MEdit and change the
appropriate data in the shape data for the part and transmit the
changes back to the machine.
Is the pickup height good? Check the pickup offset Z height for the part in question and then check
the actual pickup height for the part in the feeder. Is the pickup offset Z
good? If it is not correct, open the job in MEdit and correct the pickup
offset Z (tray, if for tray parts) in the shape data (part data) for the part in
question. Try pickup again after resending the data to the machine. If it
is very close to the correct height, try changing this offset to just be a little
lower and then try again. (Do no lower too much or part/nozzle damage
may occur.) If the pickup offset Z is good, check the levelness of the
feeder pallet and send any necessary adjustments to the module.

344 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

Point Description/countermeasure
What is the condition of the Check the condition of the nozzle being used for the part. Is the nozzle
nozzle? broken?Check to ensure that he nozzle is not cracked or chipped. Is the
spring back motion for the nozzle smooth? If it is not, remove the nozzle
and check the nozzle and holder for problems and correct as
necessary.Is the nozzle clogged? Clean the inside of the nozzle to
remove any items that might be blocking the vacuum. Try using a
different nozzle that is the same size if no problems are found.
What is the condition of the Ensure that the vacuum is sufficient in the base and the module. Check
vacuum? the nozzle vacuum filter in the head for clogging for the nozzle in
question. If it is dirty, clean it and if it cannot be cleaned, replace it.
Ensure that there is no leak between the head and the XY-robot head
connection point. If using a multiple holder head such as a H12HS head
and all parts that are picked by holders after the first few parts have
pickup problems, then that might indicate a vacuum leak problem
between the holders and the vacuum pump.

These points and countermeasures cover some of the common pickup error causes.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 345

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.3.4 Poor placing accuracy

If poor placing accuracy occurs, check the points below.

Point Description/countermeasure
Is the placing accuracy Use the simulation test command from MEdit to check the placement
problem just for one point on position for that sequence. If the placement position is not good, adjust
the panel (other parts with the the position in MEdit and transmit the changes back to the machine.
same part number have good
placements)?
Is the placing accuracy This could be due to a part data problem with this part number. Check
problem for all parts with the the following points. Ensure that the nozzle size is appropriate for the
same part number? specified transport speed.Ensure that the part height setting is correct.
Incorrect settings can mean that parts are being dropped or pushed in
the panel, which can cause placing problems. Ensure that there are no
placement offsets specified in the shape data. If a offset is specified, the
part is placed using that offset. Check the vision type and element data
settings to ensure that misalignments are not due to data errors here or
incorrect processing. Check the panel thickness and pallet thickness
settings to ensure that they are correct. If there is a problem with these
settings, then usually multiple parts will have problems. If no problems
with the above data are located, try slowing down the transport speed
and the soft place speed.
Is the placing accuracy Is the nozzle size correct for these parts? If the nozzle size is correct,
problem for all parts using the replace the nozzle and check the old nozzle for the following
same nozzle? points.Ensure that the nozzle is not cracked/chipped. Ensure that the
nozzle is not clogged. Ensure that the spring back motion for multiple
holder nozzles is smooth. Ensure that no items have adhered to the tip
of the nozzle (such as cover tape adhesive). If the problem still persists
after nozzle replacement, check the mechanical vacuum break action
for the nozzle in question for multiple nozzle heads.Check the solenoid
for H01 and H02(F) heads.
Is the placing accuracy If board fiducials are not being used for each board, then this might
problem for all parts for a indicate that the board position in the job is incorrect. Ensure that the
board with all parts shifted the board positioning in the job is correct. Change the job to use board
same way but the placing fiducials to compensate for board misalignment if possible. If not, alter
accuracy for the other boards the board positioning in the direction of the shift to improve accuracy.
on the panel good (for a
multiboard panel)?
Is the placing accuracy This can indicate a problem with a module. Check the positioning of the
problem for all parts for all backup pins and ensure that when the panel is clamped that it is flat (and
boards on the panel from a there is no natural bowing of the panel). Perform auto calibration on the
module? module. If the accuracy is still not good, then perform PAM on the
module in question.

346 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

Point Description/countermeasure
Is the placing accuracy Check the positioning of the backup pins and ensure that when the panel
problem for all/most parts for is clamped that it is flat (and there is no natural bowing of the panel). If
all boards on the panel for all the parts are all shifted in the same direction and board fiducials are not
modules? being used, this can indicate a panel fiducial to board placement
misalignment. Check the positioning in the job compared to the actual
placements and fiducials. Check the panel thickness and pallet
thickness settings to ensure that they are correct. If there is a problem
with these settings, then usually multiple parts will have problems.
Check the levelness of the machine. Perform auto calibration on the
module. If the accuracy is still not good, then perform PAM on the
module in question.
How is the printing condition? Check the condition of the solder after the panel comes from the printing
machine before it enters the machine. Is the printing good with sufficient
solder?Solder printing conditions or dryness can cause part deviations
during panel conveyance, or can affect the selfalignment during reflow.
Solder adhesion weakens when the solder dries. Therefore, the sooner
the placement occurs after printing, the better.
Is the part placement good at Check the reflow temperature profile. Improper reflow conditions can
the machine but poor after cause self-alignment problems and tombstoning. Provide a profile in
reflow? which the temperature is increased evenly over the entire panel. If the
solder melting speed differs from point to point, parts are pulled toward
the solder that melts first.

These points and countermeasures cover some of the common poor placing accuracy causes.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 347

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.3.5 Panel conveyance errors

If panel conveyance errors occur, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.

1. Read the error message for the error code.

2. Stop the module.

3. Check the following points.

Point Description / countermeasure

Is the error that a panel is Check the condition of the panel left and right sensors on the conveyor.
entering or exiting the module If there is no panel currently blocking one of these sensors but the
but it never moves even sensor amplifier mistakenly says there is a panel, that can be the cause
though the panel actually of the problem. Refer to "9. Sensitivity adjustment for the conveyor panel
does move? pass sensor" in the appropriate mechanical reference manual for
procedures on adjusting these sensors.
Is the panel stopping in the If the panel is not stopping in the correct position, ensure that the
correct position? conveyor belts are clean and have no items such as grease on them.
Ensure that the panel is not slipping on the belts due to it being too
heavy or having some thing like grease on it.

These points and countermeasures cover some of the panel conveyance error causes.

348 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

11.3.6 If there are missing parts

If there are missing parts on the panel, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.

1. Ensure that the parts are being used during production and that there are no pick errors.

2. Ensure that a skip setting for that part has not been specified while editing the job.

3. Check the condition of the part after the panel is completed in the module.

4. Check the following points.

Point Description / countermeasure

Was pickup attempted and Use the pickup troubleshooting procedures to correct the pickup error
pickup errors occurred?
Is the part picked but remains Clean the nozzle and ensure that no foreign items have adhered to the
on the nozzle after nozzle to cause the part to remain on the nozzle after placement. Ensure
placement? that the spring back motion of the nozzle is smooth. If the nozzle remains
stuck in the up position, then placement might not occur correctly. Check
for any placement height offsets in the part data and correct as needed.
Check the panel thickness and pallet thickness settings to ensure that
they are correct. If there is a problem with these settings, then usually
multiple parts will have problems.
Has the part been skipped in If the device skip function has been set in MEdit, production continuing
MEdit using the device skip without placing the part is normal. If this part must be placed, then do not
function? use this function. If this function is not used, then production cannot be
continued until that part is supplied and placed (for example if parts run
out during production).
Has the part been skipped in This setting must be manually set and should only be done when
the job settings? necessary. If the part has been skipped in the job settings then
production is being performed as specified. When parts that must be
placed are skipped, clear the skip settings in the job and then optimize
the job. Wait until all current panels in the machine have been unloaded
and then send the modified job to the machine and restart production.
Is the part being placed by the Check for interference between the part and machines after the placing
module but not on the panels module. Ensure that the part is not too high for the heads following the
before the reflow oven? placing module (for example, if a placing head following the placing
module is an H12HS, then the max. height for parts placed before the
H12HS module is 3.0 mm).

These points and countermeasures cover some of the missing parts causes.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 349

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.3.7 Panel detection errors between modules

If an error occurs that a panel is between modules but there is no

panel
The right and left conveyor sensors check to ensure that there are no panels between the modules when
they are unclamped. If there is no panel but this error still occurs, adjust the conveyor sensor that is falsely
activated. For procedures on adjusting these sensors, refer to the mechanical reference.

11.3.8 If an encoder backup error occurs

If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on the module (not on a

head).
The individual batteries in the encoder lines for each axis maintain the encoder memory for that axis.

If the encoder cable is disconnected from the motor or the battery is disconnected when there is no power
being supplied to the encoder from the machine, an encoder backup error occurs. Perform the following
steps if this occurs for an axis on the module (not an axis on the head). Only perform the following steps if
a Fuji representative has trained you on how to perform them. If you have not been trained on how to
perform the following steps, contact your Fuji representative.

1. Check the battery for that axis. If it is already connected and the encoder cable for this axis was not
disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good or not, replace the battery with
a new one.

2. Move the axis gently by hand to the correct position for that axis to reset the origin positioning.

3. Perform an MT Reset. Restart the machine and the error should be cleared and the machine can be
used for production. If it has not been cleared, check the encoder cable connection and ensure that
the battery connection is good.

350 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on a head.

The battery in the head maintains the encoder memory for the axes on the head. If the encoder cable is
disconnected from a motor or the battery is disconnected when there is no power being supplied to the
encoder from the machine, an encoder backup error occurs. Perform the following steps if this occurs for
an axis on a head. Only perform the following steps if a Fuji representative has trained you on how to
perform them. If you have not been trained on how to perform the following steps, contact your Fuji
representative.

1. Check the battery for the head. If it is already connected and the encoder cable for this axis was not
disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good or not, replace the battery with
a new one.

2. Move all of the axes on the head gently by hand to their correct positions for each axis to reset the
origin positioning.

3. Perform an MT Reset for all of the axes on the head.

4. Set nozzle jigs in the nozzle station. (Refer to "4.5.2 Removing and attaching nozzles".) Push START
and auto calibration is started. When auto calibration is completed, production can be performed. If it
has not been cleared, check the encoder cable connection and ensure that the battery connection is
good.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 351

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.3.9 If there is computer system trouble

The following are instructions for correcting trouble items that may occur within the computer system
(Fujitrax, Fuji Flexa, Fuji Accessory Software) for the machine.

When the error "????2108" and/or "8D32????" occurs on the

machine
Error conditions:

• This error may occur after the power for the machines or computers have been turned off for a long
period of time (for example, after a holiday) and the power is turned back on.

Point Description/countermeasure
Were the computers and This occurs when communication cannot be performed because the
machines turned on in the order in which items are turned on is incorrect. Turn on the power to the
correct order? items in the following order. The time for starting each item is different
due to the differences in computers and machines. Due to this, boot one
item and then log on and wait until that item is fully booted before
proceeding to the next item.
1. Boot the computer for the Fujitrax Verifier database and then any
computers for the Profiler databases (if Profiler is being used).
2. Boot any computers with the Fuji Flexa User Server, Job Server, and
Line Server (in this order if on separate computers).
3. Boot any computers with the Fujitrax Verifier server (Fuji Central
Server) for the machine. (Ensure that the Fuji Central Server service has
started.)
4. Boot any computers with the Fuji Flexa Machine Communicate
Service for machines (if they are separate from the Fuji Flexa User
Server).
5. Turn on the main switch for the machine. Production can be started
once the job has been downloaded.
Was the power for multiple If several lines exist, and the power for all of the lines is turned on
lines turned on at once? simultaneously, then multiple requests for downloading jobs from the
Fuji Flexa server for all of the machines are also conducted
simultaneously. When this happens, the Fuji Flexa server is requested
to send several jobs to several machines at once, and according to the
capability of the computer, a time up error may occur during the job
download process. Turn on one line at a time and wait until the machine
in that line has finished downloading the job before turning on the next
line.
Is the network operating This error occurs when a network hub or network cables are not
correctly? functioning correctly and/or are disconnected. Restart the power for the
network hub or replace it and/or the network cables. When the error
occurs only for the modules on a specific base, replace the network
cable that is connected to that base. When the error occurs for modules
on several different bases, replace the network hub that is being used
for those bases.

352 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

When the error "8D32????" occurs on the machine and/or the Fuji
Central Server (Fuji Profiler Central Server) stops because of an
error.
Error conditions:

• Operation cannot be started even if the order in which the computers are started is correct or the
central server is rebooted.

Point Description/countermeasure
Is the correct data saved in It is possible that incorrect data is included in the data that is saved in
the Fuji Central Server? the Fuji Central Server. Perform the follow procedure to clear the Central
Server data.
1. Stop the Fuji Central Server service (also stop the Fuji Profiler Central
Server service if it is started).
2. Change the name of the "Resume" folder in the Fujitrax install location
which is usually <drive>:/Program Files/FUJI/Trx/Verifier/KitObj/Bin.
3. Start the Fuji Central Server service (also the Fuji Profiler Central
Server if it is being used)
4. Restart the machine.
5. Transmit the job to the machine. If no error occurs, begin production.
6. If the error is not corrected, turn the machine off and then on.
Is the network operating This error occurs when a network hub or network cables are not
correctly? functioning correctly and/or are disconnected. Restart the power for the
network hub or replace it and/or the network cables. When the error
occurs only for the modules on a specific base, replace the network
cable that is connected to that base. When the error occurs for modules
on several different bases, replace the network hub that is being used
for those bases.

If the error "8D32702A" occurs for the first module of a machine

that is in production.
Error condition:

• An error occurs at the first module in a line that is using Profiler (the panel ID is read using an
external panel ID reader and a FLP).

Point Description / countermeasure

Is the panel unload sensor on This can be caused by the panel unload sensor (out side) for the
the conveyor with the panel conveyor before the machine (the conveyor installed with the panel ID
ID reading unit remaining on reading unit) remaining either ON or OFF. Adjust the panel unload
or off? sensor (out side) on the conveyor unit so that it is functioning properly.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 353

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

If the machine cannot download a job (the error "????2108"

occurs).
Error conditions:

• This error may occur after the power for the machines or computers have been turned off for a long
period of time (for example, after a holiday) and the power is turned back on.

Point Description/countermeasure
Has the job been renamed, If the job has been renamed, moved, or deleted, the machine will not be
moved, or deleted? able to locate the job and an error occurs. Undo any changes that have
been done to the previous job (such as a new name) or delete the
current job using Accessory Software and then transmit the new job to
the machine using Fuji Flexa. Refer to the Accessory Software online
manual for details on deleting jobs from the machine.
Are the Fuji Flexa server When the Fuji Flexa (user server, job server, machine communication
computers (user server, job server) computer is turned off, is in sleep mode, or is not connected with
server, machine the network, the machine cannot receive jobs and this error will occur
communication server) when attempting to download jobs. Ensure that the Fuji Flexa server
turned on and connected to (user server, job server, machine communication server) computers are
the network? turned on and connected to the network. Also, change the setting of the
computers with Fuji Flexa servers so that they will not enter sleep mode.
Change the settings for notebook computers so that the computer will
not enter sleep mode even when the cover is closed.

If production information for a line cannot be compiled or

displayed in Line Reporter or Line Monitor Client.
Error condition:

• Production information for a line report cannot be compiled only for a specific line.

• In Line Monitor Client, the background of the machine name or the line name is black.

• If the machine operation history or other functions are opened in Line Monitor Client, no data is
displayed in the graphs.

Point Description/countermeasure
Was a line change performed Production information is not totaled correctly when line settings from
successfully or are the line Fuji Flexa or line change notices are not performed correctly. The same
settings correct?Is there error may occur when there are different machines with the same IP
another machine with the address in the line settings. Follow the procedure below to report the line
same IP address in the line changes.
settings? 1. Push CYCLE STOP to stop production for the machine line for which
production data is not correctly totaled.
2. In Fuji Flexa, change the status of the line to a virtual line and send a
line change notice.
3. Next, change the status of the line to a real line and send a line
change notice.

354 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

Point Description/countermeasure
Was a current line copied and One example of trouble that occurs is when a new line is added to the
then pasted in Fuji Flexa Line factory and line configuration data in Fuji Flexa is created. If the
Editor? configuration of a line that closely resembles the line that is being
created is copied and then pasted, then there is a temporary situation
where two lines with the same configuration (IP address) exist. This may
cause errors in the collection of production data. Use the steps listed
below when creating a new line by copying an existing line.
1. Create the new line as a virtual line.
2. Copy the machine configurations that resemble the new line being
created and paste them into the virtual line that was created in step 1.
3. After changing the machine configuration (machine IP address,
machine communication service IP address) for the new line, change
the line to a real line and send a line change notice from Fuji Flexa.

If there is a discrepancy in the production information for the

number of parts used and for the number of parts rejected.
Error condition:

• There is a significant discrepancy in the totaled production information for a specific line only

Point Description/countermeasure
Is production being Production information is not totaled correctly when production is
performed using different job performed using different job names in the same line. A particular
names? characteristic of this error is that no information is displayed regarding
parts or feeders, but information regarding machine errors is displayed.
This error occurs when a job is transmitted to the background and job
changeover is performed at an individual module. Make sure that the
entire line is using the same job for production.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 355

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

If a line does not display in Floor Monitor in Accessory Software or

the module configuration is not correct.
Error conditions:

• After upgrading the machine or setting up the line, the line is not displayed in Floor Monitor.

Point Description/countermeasure
Is the data being used by the The settings in Fuji Realtime Workingrate Buffer Service (hereafter
Realtime Workingrate Buffer referred to as RWB) are not correct, or RWB is not operating properly.
service correct? Follow the procedure below to correct this data.
1. Ensure that the computer names or IP addresses are correctly set in
the machine communicate server in Fuji Flexa for the line (bases) that
does not display in Floor Monitor. The computer with the Machine
Communicate Server is the computer running the FNC Machine
Communication Service.
2. Send a line change notice from Fuji Flexa.
3. Open the [Service] window (from the Windows control panel) on the
computer with the machine communicate server for the machine and
restart the Realtime Workingrate Buffer service.
4. Access the Accessory Software website and in the upper right section
of the Floor Monitor page, click [Service List] and the click [Check] in the
[Checking and restarting RWB services] section. Then click [Restart] for
the RWB service for the line with the problem. After RWB has restarted
(approximately 10 seconds), check to see if the line is displayed in Floor
Monitor.

356 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

11.4 Troubleshooting common Fuji Flexa and

Fujitrax related issues

11.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors

After transmitting jobs, the machine requires many items to be

changed such as heads.
This can indicate a machine configuration problem in the job.

Open the job and ensure that the module configuration matches that of the actual machine (for example,
module types, head types, nozzle station types). If an error is found, correct the error and optimize the job
for the machine again.

When I attempt to transmit a job, the machine has a red X over the
icon in the [Transmit Job] dialog box, but I know the job has the
correct machine.
The most likely cause for this problem is that the job being transmitted is in the local job directory.

Copy the job into the global job directory and attempt to transmit the same job from the global directory.
When there is a red X in the [Transmit Job] dialog box the job cannot be transmitted. Only jobs in the global
directory can be transmitted to these machines.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 357

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.4.2 Fujitrax related errors

The AIMEX-3(c) machine is registered and setup correctly in the

line configuration file for Fujitrax and the system has been
restarted, but the AIMEX-3(c) still does not use Fujitrax.
The Fujitrax configuration setting for the AIMEX-3(c) must be turned on and then the machine rebooted
before the AIMEX-3(c) will access the Fujitrax system.

This setting cannot be specified on the machine, so it is necessary to use Accessory Software to change
this setting. Refer to the procedures "Making machine configuration settings" in the "Settings and
management" chapter for how to change the Fujitrax setting.

I made IDs for the parts and feeders, but when I set the parts on the
machine, it will never accept the parts even though they and the
feeders are correct.
The most likely cause for this issue is that the Quick verify required mode is set to "ON" at the computer
with the Verifier Central Server.

When this setting is on, even if the parts are correct and IDs are created, the parts will not be accepted when
set on the machine until a quick verify is performed for them. Perform a quick verify for the parts and if the
machine then accepts the feeders, then that was the issue. Turn this setting off if this mode is not desired.

358 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

After logging on to the Kit Handy, I cannot select the AIMEX-3(c)

machine in the device check mode. Nor do I see any parts out
warnings or machine errors for the machine.
The most likely cause for not being able to access the AIMEX-3(c) device check screen is that the user ID
used to log on is not registered for the AIMEX-3(c) in the Kit Handy Settings.

Start Kit Manager and have an administrator level user log on. In the line display on the left side of the
window, right-click the AIMEX-3(c) machine and select [Kit Handy Settings] from the shortcut menu that
displays.

The dialog box for the [Kit Handy Setting] displays with a list of users that are responsible for that AIMEX-
3(c) machine. Add the user ID previously used to this list.

This setting affects which machines display in the Parts out list and Machine Errors list at Kit Handy as well
as the machines that a device check can be performed on. In addition, this setting also determines which
machines display under the [Operator] branch in Kit Manager for the user logged on.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 359

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

11.5 Troubleshooting machine issues

Many units set on the machine can be replaced easily without any special measurements or skill required.
If a unit quits working or there is an intermediate problem, replace the unit and check the condition of the
new unit.

If the machine works properly with the new unit, send the old unit to your Fuji representative along with
details of the problem so it can be repaired.

Units can be exchanged, however only qualified Fuji representatives can replace parts on units and perform
adjustments. This ensures that all units have the same accuracy and this is one of the reasons for easy
replacement and the lack of required special measurements. Some examples of "units" are the parts
camera/lighting unit, head, module CPU, and the mark camera/lighting unit.

Note
If an item is not in the mechanical reference and the procedures for replacing are unknown, then do not attempt to replace the item. Contact
your Fuji representative for guidance about the item.

If a major problem is encountered (such as, numerous OS errors) and it cannot be resolved, acquire the
trace data from all of the related items. Also, send this data to your Fuji representative along with a detailed
explanation of the conditions in which the problem occurs, any steps taken to resolve the problem, and any
error codes displayed. This information can help to resolve problems quickly.

360 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 11. Troubleshooting

11.6 Acquiring trace data

Use the following procedures to acquire trace data from the machine when errors and software issues
occur.

There are two methods for acquiring trace data.

a. Acquiring from Accessory Software.

b. Acquiring after operating system errors

11.6.1 Acquiring temporarily saved data trace on the machine

By using commands on the machine, it is possible to generate trace data. This allows trace data to be saved
temporarily in the machine if an error occurs during production.

Refer to "5.9 Saving trace data"for details.

Afterwards, acquire the trace data using Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire
Trace] from the machine accessories section when the machine is selected.

11.6.2 Acquiring after operating system errors

Use the following procedure if an operating system error or application error occurs. The procedures below
must be followed. If the main power switch for the machine is not turned on and then off, trace data cannot
be acquired using Accessory Software due to a communication error.

1. Turn off the main switch of the machine.

2. Turn on the main power switch.

3. When the module has started and entered sleep mode, acquire the trace data using Accessory
Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire Trace] from the machine accessories section when
the module is selected.

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference 361

11. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0

362 AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

 Fuji Technical Information Website

The Fuji Technical Information website aims at providing up-to-date

information to our customers in the most efficient manner. This site
provides the latest technical information and a range of services, from
manuals, upgrade reports, sample part data, to custom part support. Fuji
hopes that the vast wealth of information on this site will be used in
addition to the services provided by your Fuji representative.
Membership is required in order to access the Fuji Technical Information
website. Please contact your Fuji representative for membership details.
Any comments or opinions regarding this document can be sent to the
email address below.
Email address: [email protected]

AIMEX III/AIMEX IIIc System Reference

Management No. Date Notes

SYS-AIMEX3C-005E0 February 17, 2017 -

SYS-AIMEX3C-006E0 April 3, 2017 -
SYS-AIMEX3C-007E0 June 30, 2017 -
SYS-AIMEX3C-008E0 November 6, 2017 -

FUJI Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd.

19 Chausuyama, Yamamachi, Chiryu, Aichi Prefecture,
472-8686, Japan Tel: +81 (0)566 81-2111

 2017 FUJI MACHINE MFG. CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.

Printed in Japan
This manual is printed on recycled paper.